Skip to main content

Full text of "A manual of infectious diseases occurring in schools [electronic resource]"

See other formats


4 

-•ruTE  OF  Child  HEALin 


A  MANUAL  OF  INFECTIOUS  DISEASES 
OCCURRING  IN  SCHOOLS 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2014 


https://arcliive.org/details/b21686774 


1^ 


CANCELLED  L 

A  MANUAL  OF 

INFECTIOUS  DISEASES 
OCCURRING  IN  SCHOOLS 

(Issued  by  the  Association  of  Preparatory  Schools), 


BY 

H.  G.  ARMSTRONG,   M.R.C.S.,  L.S.A. 

'  Medical  Officer  to  Wellington  College; 

AND 

J.   M.   FORTESCUE-BRICKDALE,   M.A.,  M.D 

Physician  to  Clifton  College;  Assistant  Physician,  Royal  Infirmary,  Bristol; 
Clinical  Lecturer,  University  of  Bristol 

CAN 

WITH   CHAPTERS  ON 
INFECTIOUS    EYE  DISEASES 
By  R.  W.  DOYNE,  M.A.,  F.R.C.S. 

Margaret  Ogilvy  Reader  in  Ojihthabnology,  University  of  Oxjord 

AND 

RINGWORM 
By  H.  ALDERSMITH,  M.B.,  F.R.C.S. 

Medical  Officer  to  Christ's  Hospital 


BRISTOL:   JOHN  WRIGHT  AND  SONS  LTD. 
LONDON  :  SIMPKIN,  MARSHALL,  HAMILTON,  KENT  AND  CO.  LTD. 

191  2 


I  CLASS  2mJ  aJIccx 

JOHN  WRIGHT  AND  SONS  LTD., 
PRINTERS    AND    PUBLISHERS,  BRISTOL. 


LlbKAKY 

.vsTm!T=  Of  Child  heali 


PREFACE. 


This  manual  of  Infectious  Diseases  has  been  written 
for,  and  is  being  issued  by  the  Association  of  Prepara- 
tory Schools. 

The  assemblage  of  large  numbers  of  young  persons 
under  one  roof  leads  to  the  introduction  and  ready 
spread  of  the  infectious  diseases  to  which  they  are 
specially  Hable.  The  Association  feels  that  a  manual, 
setting  forth  the  characteristics  of  each  disease,  will 
be  of  assistance  to  the  masters  and  mistresses  of 
schools  in  dealing  with  them.  Intended  primarily 
for  their  use,  the  effort  of  the  authors  has  been  to  give 
a  cHnical  picture,  as  complete  as  possible,  of  the 
features  of  the  various  diseases ;  questions  of 
pathology  have  been  only  Ughtly  touched  on  and 
treatment  has  been  dealt  with  only  in  a  general  way, 
the  special  treatment  of  each  individual  case  being 
the  province  of  the  medical  man  in  charge.  Though 
written  primarily  for  laymen,  it  is  hoped,  however, 
that  the  manual  may  be  found  to  be  of  some  assist- 
ance to  doctors  in  their  school  practices. 

For  its  compilation  the  Council  obtained  the  ser- 
vices of  medical  men,  who,  being  in  charge  of  large 
Public  Schools,  were  able  to  write   from  their 


vi 


PREFACE 


personal  experience.  Although  the  authors  have,  in 
the  main,  depended  on  their  own  experiences,  ample 
use  has  been  made  of  the  writings  of  others  ;  but, 
in  a  work  of  this  scope  and  object,  it  has  not  been 
found  possible  to  give  many  bibliographical  references. 

The  chapter  on  Infectious  Ophthalmia  has  been 
contributed  by  Mr.  R.  W.  Doyne,  the  Margaret 
Ogilvy  Reader  in  Ophthalmology  in  Oxford  Univer- 
sity. 

It  has  been  found  difficult  to  avoid  altogether  the 
use  of  medical  and  scientific  terms,  but  these  have, 
as  far  as  possible,  been  placed  in  foot  notes.  A 
glossary  has  been  appended  of  those  employed  in 
the  text. 


CONTENTS. 


I. — The  Specific  Infectious  Diseases     .  r 
IJ. — The  Acute  Exanthemata  ....  23 

III.  — ^Measles     .......  29 

IV.  — Rubella.    German  Measles      ...  42 
V. — Scarlet  Fever.    Scarlatina     .       .  .46 

VI. — Chicken  Pox     .       .       .       .       .  .58 

VII. — ^MuMPS       .......  62 

VIII. — Whooping  Cough       .....  66 

IX. — Glandular  Fever     .....  70 

X. — Diphtheria        ......  72 

XI. — Typhoid  Fever,    Enteric  Fever       .       .  85 
XII. — Cerebro-spinal  Meningitis        ...  97 

XIII.  — Epidemic  Poliomyelitis     ....  104 

XIV.  — Infectious  Diseases  of  the  Eye      .  .107 
XV. — Ringworm  .       .       .       .       .       .  .117 

XVI. — Impetigo    .......  135 

XVII. — School  Epidemiology        ....  137 

Glossary  .......  142 

Index  143 


A  MANUAL  OF  INFECTIOUS/^ 
DISEASES  OCCURRING  IN  SCHOtXi:-S  j^^V' 


CHAPTER  I. 
THE  SPECIFIC  INFECTIOUS  DISEASES. 

THE  group  of  diseases  known  as  the  "  specific 
infections "  comprises  a  large  number  of 
complaints  varying  greatly  in  their  symptoms, 
course,  and  geographical  distribution.  Some  last 
for  a  few  days  or  weeks,  others,  it  may  be,  for  a  life- 
time ;  some  are  limited  to  certain  regions,  such  as 
the  tropics,  others  occur  wherever  man  makes  his 
habitation  ;  some  are  severe  and  dangerous,  others 
almost  invariably  mild,  others  again  vary  in  the 
severity  of  their  symptoms  in  different  races, 
chmates  and  circumstances.  But  in  spite  of  these 
diverse  characteristics,  one  fact  serves  as  a  basis  of 
classification  and  unites  the  whole  group,  and  this 
fact  is  that  the  diseases  in  question  are  directly 
or  indirectly  communicable  from  one  individual  to 
another,  and  that  in  no  case  can  any  one  disease  give 
rise  to  another  different  one  ;  in  other  words,  the 
specific  infections  always  "  breed  true."  The  word 
"  specific  "  is  apphed  to  the  group  to  denote  this 
fact. 

Various  subdivisions  of  this  large  and  important 
class  have  been  made.  In  these  pages  only  a  very 
few  of  the  specific  infections  will  be  considered — 

1 


INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  IN  SCHOOLS 


namely,  those  which  ran  a  short  and  more  or  less 
definite  course  usually  accompanied  by  fever,  and  in 
which  the  infection  is  readily  passed  from  one  person 
to  another  ;  they  are  therefore  known  as  the  "  acute 
specific  fevers,"  or  "infectious  fevers."  Owing  to 
the  fact  that  a  prominent  symptom  in  many  cases 
is  the  appearance  of  a  rash  or  eraption  upon  the  skin, 
the  term  "  eraptive  fevers  "  is  also  used,  while  their 
infectious  character  is  indicated  in  the  general  term 
"communicable  diseases," "which  is  applied  to  the 
whole  group.  The  term  "  zymotic  diseases,"  which 
is  still  not  infrequently  used,  is  intended  to  give 
expression  to  the  opinion  now  widely  held  as  to  their 
real  cause  or  causes  ;  the  word  having  been  scientifi- 
cally applied  to  the  so-called  "living  ferments" 
(zymo!)  which  are  now  more  usually  known  as  germs, 
microbes  or  bacteria.  This  name  may  conveniently 
lead  us  on  to  consider  the  origin  of  the  specific 
infections. 

According  to  the  view  now  generally  held,  all 
these  diseases  are  due  to  the  invasion  of  the  body 
by  minute  living  organisms,  each  disease  being 
produced  by  its  own  particular  germ.  These  micro- 
scopical particles  of  living  matter  belong  to  various 
groups,  but  are  all  of  them,  as  far  as  is  known, 
unicellular,  that  is  consisting  of  a  single  ceU  or  unit 
of  living  matter  (or  protoplasm)  which  is  able  to 
perform  all  the  vital  functions  of  nutrition,  excretion, 
reproduction,  and  in  some  cases  the  function  of 
locomotion.  Some  of  these  belong  to  the  class 
known  as  bacteria  which  lies  on  the  confines  of  the 
animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms,  but  is  usually  held 
to  belong  to  the  latter.  The  bacteria  themselves 
are  subdivided  into  famihes  according  to  their  shape, 
round  ones  being  known  as  cocci,  straight,  rod-shaped 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  3 

ones  as  bacilli,  wavy  rod-shaped  ones  as  spirilla, 
vibriones,  or  vibrios. 

Other  classes  of  unicellular  organisms,  however, 
also  contribute  to  the  army  of  disease  producers; 
these  are  of  a  rather  more  highly  organized  and 
more  definitely  animal  type ;  they  belong  to  the 
group  known  as  protozoa  or  primitive  organisms, 
and  the  exact  classification  of  the  species  within 
the  group  is  still,  in  the  imperfect  condition  of 
our  knowledge,  a  matter  of  great  difficulty  and 
not  a  little  dispute.  All  these  germs  are  called 
"  pathogenic,"  that  is  to  say,  disease  producing, 
and  it  must  be  clearly  understood  that  a  much 
larger  number  of  both  bacteria  and  other  unicel- 
lular organisms  are  known,  which  are  apparently 
quite  incapable  of  producing  disease  either  in  man 
or  other  animals  ;  others  affect  particular  classes 
of  animals  only,  and  others  again  are  injurious  to 
plants. 

Organisms  producing  disease  do  so  by  living  and 
growing  in  the  body  of  the  animal  affected,  and  are 
thus  called  parasitic.  But  in  many  cases  they  are 
quite  capable  of  leading  an  independent  existence 
to  which  the  term  saprophytic  has  been  applied. 
Thus  three  modes  of  life  are  known  among  germs  : 
the  purely  parasitic,  the  purely  saprophytic,  and  that 
which  at  one  time  is  parasitic  and  at  another  sapro- 
phytic according  to  circumstances.  In  many  cases 
very  Httle  is  known  of  the  Hfe  history  of  germs  outside 
the  body  of  man  or  animal,  but  it  is  obvious  that 
this  is  an  important  branch  of  knowledge  in  relation 
to  the  prevention  of  disease. 

One  fact,  however,  is  of  importance  in  this  con- 
nexion, though  it  apphes  only  to  a  certain  number 
of  cases.    Some  bacteria  have  the  power  of  forming 


4        INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOlS 


what  are  called  spores,  minute  rounded  bodies  which 
are  remarkably  resistant  to  adverse  environment, 
and  can  live  in  a  quiescent  state  for  long  periods 
and  under  circumstances  in  which  their  parent 
organisms  would  certainly  and  speedily  succumb. 

The  following  diseases  are  known  to  be  caused  by 
bacteria  :  typhoid  fever  (or  enteric  fever),  diphtheria, 
cerebro-spinal  meningitis,  impetigo,  besides  others 
not  dealt  with  in  this  book.  Whooping  cough  is 
probably  due  to  a  bacillus  somewhat  resembling 
the  so-called  influenza  bacillus  of  Pfeiffer  ;  scarlet 
fever  is  possibly  due  to  a  protozoon,  though  a  special 
form  of  streptococcus  (one  of  the  bacteria)  has  also 
been  considered  the  causal  agent  by  several  high 
authorities.  Smallpox  is  very  probably  produced 
by  an  organism  of  the  same  class  as  that  which 
causes  malaria.* 

There  is  at  present  no  evidence  that  chicken  pox 
is  produced  by  any  allied  protozoon,  and  with  regard 
to  this  disease,  as  well  as  measles,  rubella,  and  certain 
others,  we  can  only  say  at  present  that  the  presump- 
tion is  very  strongly  in  favour  of  their  being  due  to 
some  form  of  minute  organism  the  characteristics 
and  history  of  which  have  not  yet  been  discovered. 

Organisms  may  enter  the  animal  body  in  various 
ways.  A  shght  abrasion  of  the  skin  may  allow  the 
coccus  of  impetigo  or  the  more  deadly  streptococcus  of 
erysipelas  to  make  its  entry  ;  the  mucous  membrane 
of  the  mouth,  throat,  and  nose  may  similarly  allow 
the  entry  of  organisms  through  some  sHght  local 
lesion.    This  very  Ukely  occurs  in  diphtheria,  and 


*  It  is  called  the  Cytoryctes  Variolas,  and  probably  passes 
through  several  phases  of  existence,  one  of  wliich  produces 
the  disease. 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  5 


possibly  in  cerebro-spinal  meningitis,  though  some 
think  that  in  the  latter  case  the  organisms  enter  by 
the  intestinal  mucous  membrane.  In  typhoid  fever 
the  Hning  membrane  of  the  bowel  is  most  probably 
the  portal  of  entry  for  the  bacillus. 

When  once  the  germ  has  gained  a  hold  on  the 
animal  body,  one  of  two  things  may  happen.  It 
may,  in  the  first  place,  pass  into  the  blood  stream 
or  the  small  channels  called  the  lymph  vessels,  which 
everywhere  help  to  convey  fluid  to  the  tissues,  and 
by  this  means  become  widely  distributed  through- 
out the  body  ;  or  it  may,  in  the  second  place,  remain 
close  to  the  site  of  invasion,  and  there  grow  and 
multiply.  In  either  case  it  is  probable  that  many, 
if  not  all  the  symptoms  of  disease  are  produced  by 
certain  products  formed  by  the  germs  and  known 
generally  as  toxins  or  poisons.  These  toxins  are 
sometimes  excreted  by  the  germs  during  their  life, 
and  pass  into  aU  the  tissues  of  the  body  ;  this  will 
happen  even  when  the  actual  organisms  only  live 
and  thrive  in  a  small  restricted  area,  such  as  the 
throat  in  the  case  of  diphtheria.  Other  organisms 
appear  to  retain  their  toxins  within  their  own 
bodies,  but  are  thought  to  yield  them  up  when 
they  die  and  become  disintegrated,  so  that  the 
ultimate  effect  is  similar  in  either  case.  This 
distinction,  however,  is  of  considerable  practical 
importance  with  regard  to  the  means  at  our  disposal 
for  combating  the  disease  caused  by  any  particular 
germ. 

Now  it  is  a  well  known  and  generally  recog- 
nized fact  that  aU  persons  who  are  exposed  to  an 
infectious  disease  do  not  develop  the  symptoms 
with  the  same  degree  of  severity,  and  that  in  some 
cases  individuals  appear  to  escape  infection  altogether. 


6        INFECTIOUS   DISEASES   IN  SCHOOLS 


This  has  been  expressed  by  saying  that  in  all 
infections  there  are  two  factors,  the  "seed"  and 
the  "  soil."  The  seed  is  represented  of  course  by  the 
germ,  the  soil  by  the  tissues  of  the  person  in  whom 
the  germ  is  located.  The  seed  may  be  strong  and 
healthy,  but  there  may  be  some  characteristic  in  the 
soil  which  prevents  its  growth  and  development, 
so  that  instead  of  thriving  and  multiplying  till  it 
produces  the  symptoms  of  disease,  it  remains  in  a 
passive  condition  or  dies  out  altogether.  When  an 
individual  is  insusceptible  to  any  given  disease  of 
this  nature,  he  is  said  to  be  "  immune." 

The  question  of  immunity  is  indeed  a  vast  and 
difficult  one,  and  although  it  has  been  largely  in- 
vestigated by  a  great  number  of  able  men,  it  is 
still  in  considerable  confusion,  so  complex  and 
difficult  of  interpretation  are  the  facts,  and  so 
elaborate  are  the  experiments  and  deductions  which 
have  been  devised  to  explain  them.  This  at  least 
is  known  ;  immunity  may  be  of  two  sorts,  natural 
or  acquired.  Natural  immunity  is  exemplified  in 
certain  animals ;  thus  fowls  are  naturally  immune 
to  the  disease  known  as  anthrax,  and  tortoises  to 
the  disease  known  as  tetanus  or  lockjaw.  Acquired 
immunity  is  exemplified  in  the  case  of  individuals 
who  have  passed  through  an  attack  of  infectious 
disease,  and  are  then  protected  for  a  longer  or 
shorter  period  from  a  second  attack  of  the  same 
character.  These  two  conditions  probably  differ 
essentially  in  the  way  in  which  they  are  produced. 
In  the  first  case  it  is  possible  that  the  animal 
fails  to  acquire  the  disease  because  its  tissues  are 
incapable  of  being  affected  by  the  poison  or  toxin 
produced  by  the  invading  germ  ;  the  toxin  is  pos- 
sibly formed,  but  is,  for  that  animal  or  individual, 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  7 

innocuous.  In  the  second  case  it  is  possible  that 
the  infected  animal  has,  as  a  result  of  the  previous 
attack,  produced  within  itself  an  antidote  to  the 
poison  or  toxin,  which  neutrahzes  it  as  soon  as  it  is 
formed.  This  form  of  immunity  can  be  artificially 
induced  in  the  case  of  some  diseases  by  injecting 
into  a  susceptible  animal  small  quantities  of  the 
germ  causing  the  disease  or  its  toxin,  and  gradually 
increasing  the  dose  as  the  animal  becomes  more  and 
more  immune.  In  diphtheria,  to  take  the  best 
known  and  most  conspicuous  instance,  it  is  possible 
by  injecting  repeated  and  increasing  quantities  of 
the  bacterial  toxins  into  a  large  animal  (such  as  the 
horse)  to  produce  a  condition  of  immunity,  so  that 
very  large  doses,  much  greater  than  those  which 
would  ordinarily  be  fatal,  fail  to  produce  any  reaction. 
The  animal  is  then  said  to  possess  active  immunity. 
The  serum  or  fluid  portion  of  its  blood  can  be  shown 
experimentally  to  be  capable  of  neutralizing  the 
toxins  or  poisons  produced  by  the  bacillus  when 
artificially  cultivated.  When  injected  into  the  body 
of  a  patient  suffering  from  diphtheria  the  same 
result  occurs  ;  much  of  the  poison  is  immediately 
neutraHzed,  and  the  patient  is  thereby  considerably 
helped  on  towards  recovery. 

The  neutrahzing  agents  in  the  blood  serum  are 
known  as  "  antitoxins,"  and  belong  to  a  large  class 
of  substances  which  are  produced  by  the  injection 
of  foreign  substances  into  the  blood  stream  of  an 
animal  and  by  other  means  also,  and  which  are 
collectively  known  by  the  barbarous  name  of  "  anti- 
bodies." Thus  the  antitoxin  of  diphtheria  is  an 
antibody  to  the  toxin  of  the  diphtheria  bacillus  ; 
the  serum  recently  introduced  for  cerebro-spinal 
meningitis  is  not  a  definitely  antitoxic  serum ;  it  is 


8        INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

stated  by  some  to  be  an  anti-bacterial  serum  which 
weakens  or  kills  the  bacteria  themselves.  Sera 
have  also  been  prepared  to  act  against  typhoid, 
pneumonia,  and  other  diseases,  but  they  have  not 
as  a  rule  been  very  successful,  partly  perhaps 
because  they  cannot  be  produced  in  a  sufficiently 
concentrated  form,  and  partly  owing  to  variations 
in  the  toxins  they  are  designed  to  combat. 

The  immunity  produced  by  the  injection  of  anti- 
toxin (which  is  also  used  to  a  certain  extent  to 
protect  those  likely  to  be  attacked)  is  what  is  called 
a  passive  immunity,  and  from  the  blood  of  those  so 
immunized  no  curative  serum  can  be  obtained. 

In  the  case  of  other  diseases,  immunity  can  be 
produced  by  the  injection  of  an  artificial  preparation 
containing  the  dead  bodies  of  the  causal  organism. 
There  have  been  many  technical  difficulties  to  over- 
come before  this  method  could  be  practically  applied 
to  medicine  ;  sometimes  by  means  of  an  elaborate 
technique  the  actual  number  of  organisms  to  be 
injected  is  counted,  in  order  to  obtain  an  appropriate 
dosage  ;  in  others  the  dose  has  been  determined  by 
special  observations  on  the  animal  into  which  they 
are  injected.  These  preparations  are  known  as 
"  vaccines  " — again  an  unfortunate  name,  as  they 
differ  essentially  from  the  smallpox  vaccine.  Vaccines 
have  been  employed  successfully  in  curing  a  number 
of  conditions,  mainly  those  produced  by  various 
cocci,  and  associated  with  the  formation  of  pus,  or 
matter,  such  as  boils,  abscesses  and  the  like.  A 
successful  vaccine  has  also  been  prepared  as  a  pro- 
tective against  typhoid  fever  (see  page  95). 

The  ordinary  "  vaccination "  against  smallpox 
differs  from  the  above  described  vaccines,  for  here 
the  organism   (which  is  almost  certainly  not  a 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  9 

bacterium)  is  not  artificially  grown  and  then  killed, 
but  is  naturally  modified  by  its  passage  through 
the  living  body  of  another  animal,  namely  the 
calf,  which  so  alters  its  virulence  that  it  can  no 
longer  set  up  the  train  of  symptoms  known  as 
variola  or  smallpox ;  it  is  still  able,  however,  to 
produce  immunity  in  the  person  into  whom  it  is 
passed.  Before  use  the  vaccine  is  in  this  case  sub- 
jected to  many  processes  which  effectually  prevent 
the  introduction  of  other  possibly  harmful  bodies, 
and  the  finished  product  is  really  a  highly  artificial 
substance  suspended  in  glycerine. 

We  can  now  consider  the  various  ways  in  which 
infectious  diseases  are  passed  on  from  one  person 
to  another  under  the  actual  conditions  of  life.  A 
distinction  is  sometimes  drawn  between  infectious 
and  contagious  diseases,  the  former  being  those  in 
which  very  close  contact  is  not  necessary  for  the 
transmission  of  the  infection,  and  the  latter  being 
those  in  which  something  like  actual  contact  is 
required.  The  distinction  is  not  really  of  much 
value,  and  is  also  somewhat  artificial.  It  is  per- 
haps better  to  drop  it  altogether  and  to  speak  of 
all  these  diseases  as  infectious  or  communicable. 
The  following  are  the  chief  methods  of  transmis- 
sion : — 

(i)  Direct. — ^That  is  from  one  person  to  another. 
In  a  disease  hke  diphtheria,  when  the  germs  are  in 
the  throat,  they  may  easily  be  ejected  by  coughing, 
and,  becoming  mixed  with  the  fine  almost  invisible 
dust  of  the  air,  be  inhaled  by  another  person. 
Probably  measles,  scarlet  fever  and  other  diseases 
are  spread  from  one  person  to  another  in  a  similar 
manner.  In  smallpox,  the  causal  organism  is 
contained  in  the  pustules  on  the  skin,  m  typhoid 


10      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


fever  it  is  in  the  excretions  from  the  bowel,  and  in 
these  diseases  may  easily  spread  on  to  the  persons 
generally  of  those  who  are  suffering  from  an  attack. 
In  some  diseases,  however,  it  is  now  quite  well  known 
that  persons  may  harbour  the  causal  germs  without 
themselves  presenting  any  symptoms  of  iUness.  In 
diphtheria  and  typhoid  this  has  repeatedly  been 
shown  to  occur.  Apparently  healthy  children  may 
have  diphtheria  germs  for  many  months  in  their 
throats,  and  adults  may  carry  typhoid  germs  in  their 
intestines.  These  persons  are  called  "  carriers," 
and  as  the  germs  are  in  many  cases  virulent,  these 
carriers  may  set  up  the  disease  in  others  with  whom 
they  are  in  contact. 

(2)  Indirect. — ^That  is  by  means  of  some  inter- 
mediary person,  object,  or  animal.  Germs  may  be 
carried  on  the  clothes  or  hands  of  those  attending 
on  the  sick,  or  on  inanimate  objects,  such  as  books, 
bedding,  food,  or  feeding  utensils.  The  degree  in 
which  this  is  possible  varies  in  different  diseases.  In 
some  the  genn  causing  the  disease  is  capable  of 
surviving  for  a  long  time  outside  the  human  body, 
in  others,  especially  if  exposed  to  air  and  sunshine, 
it  very  quickly  dies. 

Inanimate  objects  which  are  infected  by  a  sick 
person  are  often  called  fomites,  because  they  may 
set  up  a  wide-spread  epidemic,  as  a  spark  may 
kindle  a  conflagration.  Dust,  either  the  palpable 
dust  such  as  we  aU  know  in  dry  windy  weather, 
or  those  fine  particles  which  occur  in  the  air  of 
most  houses  but  are  only  seen  as  "sunbeams," 
may  be  impregnated  with  the  germs  of  disease  and 
assist  in  spreading  infection.  This  occurred  in  the 
South  African  war  when  dust  charged  with  typhoid 
germs  carried  the  disease  to  great  distances,  but, 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  11 

on  the  whole,  the  theory  of  air-borne  infection  is  now 
held  to  have  only  a  very  limited  application. 

Insects  may  also  carry  germs.  The  common  house- 
fly is  a  notorious  offender  in  this  respect ;  he  walks 
upon  contaminated  material,  or  even  feeds  upon  it, 
and  then,  in  the  course  of  his  peregrinations,  alights 
on  articles  of  food  on  which  he  deposits  virulent 
germs.  Hence  the  importance  of  clearing  out  dust- 
bins, manure  heaps,  and  refuse  of  aU  sorts,  which  are 
the  usual  breeding  ground  for  these  creatures.  Milk, 
and  water  may,  as  is  well  known,  carry  disease  germs 
and  set  up  an  epidemic.  The  diseases  most  commonly 
propagated  in  this  manner  are  typhoid  fever,  scarlet 
fever,  and  to  a  lesser  extent  diphtheria.  Butter  and 
cream  may  act,  of  course,  in  the  same  way  as  milk. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  in  this  account  of  the 
way  infective  diseases  are  spread  no  mention  has 
been  made  of  defective  drainage  as  a  cause  of 
epidemic  disease.  Practically  the  only  disease  in 
this  country  which  is  likely  to  occur  in  epidemic 
form  owing  to  defects  in  drainage  is  typhoid  fever. 
If  the  discharges  from  a  patient  containing  the 
typhoid  germs  are  carelessly  emptied  into  the  drains, 
and  owing  to  some  leak  or  defects  the  contaminated 
sewage  gets  into  the  water  supply,  obviously  fresh 
cases  of  disease  are  likely,  if  not  certain,  to  occur  in 
those  drinking  the  polluted  water.  But  the  popular 
idea  that  if  a  case  of  diphtheria  or  scarlet  fever 
occurs  in  a  house,  something  must  be  wrong  with  the 
drains,  is  for  the  most  part  erroneous.  It  is  true 
that  expert  investigation  will  often  detect  faults  in 
any  drainage  system,  but  this  does  not  prove  that 
the  disease  in  question  was  caused  by  the  defect 
which  has  been  discovered,  and  the  hasty  assumption 
that  when  the  drains  are  set  right  all  has  been  done 


12      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES   IN  SCHOOLS 


that  is  needful  may  prove  an  absolute  danger,  because 
it  tends  to  divert  attention  from  the  true  cause  of 
the  infection,  which  is  possibly  to  be  found  in  a 
"  carrier "  or  some  mild  and  consequently  un- 
diagnosed case, 

A  house  into  which  sewer  gas  is  constantly  escaping 
is,  of  course,  not  a  desirable  residence  from  the  point 
of  view  of  health,  and  may  have  a  deleterious  effect 
on  the  general  condition  of  those  living  in  it.  Under 
these  circumstances  they  may  be  less  able  to  resist 
the  attacks  of  disease-producing  germs,  so  that  bad 
drainage,  as  may  any  unhealthy  environment,  may 
pave  the  way  to  epidemic  disease,  though  it  is  not 
the  actual  cause. 

The  next  point  with  which  we  must  deal  is  the 
general  course  of  an  infectious  fever.  After  the 
germ  or  organism  causing  the  disease  has  found  a 
lodgment  in  the  body,  or  as  we  may  say,  the  patient 
has  taken  the  infection,  a  more  or  less  definite  period 
elapses  before  any  symptoms  occur.  This  is  called 
the  "  incubation  period,"  and  is  perhaps  partly 
occupied  by  the  multiphcation  of  the  germs  and 
partly  by  the  elaboration  of  their  poisons  and  the 
fixing  of  these  poisons  on  to  the  tissues  and  cells  of 
the  body.  This  period  is  succeeded  by  the  period 
of  invasion,  when  the  characteristic  symptoms  of 
the  disease  are  suddenly  or  gradually  manifested. 
As  with  the  period  of  incubation,  the  stage  of  invasion 
is  more  or  less  definitely  self  limited  in  each  disease  ; 
that  is  to  say,  most  cases  pass  into  the  developed 
acute  stage  and  then  into  the  fourth  stage  of  defer- 
vescence ;  or  else  they  die  within  a  period  which 
may  be  roughly  forecast.  During  the  last  penod 
(defervescence)  the  symptoms  gradually  abate  and 
the  patient  becomes  convalescent. 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  13 

The  period  of  invasion  is  in  most  cases  character- 
ized by  "  fever,"  a  term  which  connotes  a  group  of 
symptoms,  and  not,  as  is  popularly  thought,  a  rise 
of  temperature  alone.  These  symptoms  are  :  a  rise 
of  temperature,  a  rapid  pulse  and  respiration,  a  hot 
dry  skin,  a  furred  tongue  and  sometimes  shivering 
fits  or  "  rigors."  Appetite  is  lost  and  digestion  much 
impaired ;  the  urine  is  usually  scanty  and  high 
coloured,  and  on  standing  may  show  a  thick  red 
deposit.  The  bowels  are  constipated,  and  the 
patient  complains  of  thirst,  headache,  pains  about 
the  body,  nausea,  and  a  general  sensation  of  dis- 
comfort or  illness,  which  has  been  summed  up  in 
the  word  "  malaise."  Often  the  febrile  condition 
is  ushered  in  by  vomiting. 

A  few  words  may  now  be  said  on  the  general 
management  of  fever  patients.  The  temperature 
itself,  unless  it  rises  to  an  abnormally  high  degree  or 
continues  an  unusually  lengthy  period,  is  not  usually 
treated.  In  some  cases  patients  are  thought  to  do 
better  when  their  temperature  is  high,  rather  than 
below  what  is  the  usual  average  for  the  disease.  In 
any  case  the  rise  in  temperature  is  very  hkely  a 
protective  reaction  ;  that  is,  it  is  one  of  nature's 
methods  of  combating  the  invading  germs,  and 
should  not  be  unnecessarily  checked.  A  fever 
patient  should  be  nursed  in  a  large  airy  room  ; 
where  several  are  nursed  together  144  square  feet  of 
floor  space  should  be  allowed  to  each  bed,*  and  the 
room  should  be  fairly  lofty,  adequately  ventilated, 
and  well  supplied  with  sunHght.    The  patient's 

*  In  practice  it  is  not  always  possible  to  give  so  large  a 
floor  space  to  each  bed,  though  all  authorities  consider  that 
this  is  the  proper  amount  to  allow.  At  any  rate  the  floor 
space  should  not  be  less  than  100  square  feet  to  each  bed. 


14      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


skin  should  be  well  sponged  over  with  tepid  water 
once  or  twice  daily,  he  should  be  aUowed  plenty  of 
water  to  drink,  the  bowels  should  be  kept  acting, 
and  the  diet  be  confined  to  fluid  and  easily  digested 
substances,  of  which  the  principal  example  is  milk. 
The  temperature  of  the  room  should  be  kept  at  about 
60°  Fahrenheit  and  should  not  vary  more  than  two 
or  three  degrees  ;  and  though  protected  from  draught 
and  chills,  the  patient  should  not  be  overloaded 
with  bed  clothes.  Quiet  must  be  enforced,  both  in 
the  sick  room  and  outside  it,  as  undue  noise  may 
often  prevent  that  sleep  which  is  so  important  to 
the  well-being  of  the  invahd. 

We  will  conclude  this  general  account  of  the 
infections  by  a  few  words  on  the  subject  of  the 
prevention,  or,  as  it  is  called,  "  prophylaxis "  of 
disease.  The  measures  at  our  disposal  may  be 
classified  under  the  following  headings  : — 

I.  Preventive  inoculations  and  antitoxins. — ^These, 
the  best  of  all  known  methods  of  prevention,  can 
unfortunately  only  be  applied  to  a  few  diseases, 
owing  to  the  imperfect  state  of  our  knowledge. 

Foremost,  of  course,  comes  smallpox,  which  by  a 
thorough  system  of  vaccination  and  revaccination 
can  be  practically  abolished,  or  at  any  rate  reduced 
to  inconsiderable  dimensions.  Next,  with  regard 
to  typhoid  fever,  it  seems  fairly  certain  that  protec- 
tive injections  of  antityphoid  vaccine  are  of  consider- 
abe  value,  but  at  present  their  application  cannot, 
for  reasons  too  technical  to  be  gone  into  in  this  place, 
be  so  widespread  as  is  possible  in  the  case  of  vaccina- 
tion for  smallpox.  In  any  given  case  expert  opinion 
must  decide  whether  this  measure  is  applicable  or  not. 
The  same  may  be  said  of  protective  injections  of 
anti-diphtheric  serum,  which,  though  for  different 


THE   SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  15 

reasons,  cannot  always  be  carried  out,  although  in 
many  cases  they  may  be  found  very  advisable. 

Against  the  other  infectious  diseases  common  in 
this  country,  we  have  at  present  no  means  of  this 
kind  on  which  we  can  rely. 

2.  Isolation. — ^The  isolation  of  the  patient  is  the 
chief  measure  on  which  we  rely  for  the  prevention 
of  the  spread  of  the  disease,  and  this  therefore  should 
be  carried  out  as  thoroughly  and  at  as  early  a  moment 
as  is  possible.  In  schools,  infectious  cases  should 
be  nursed  in  a  separate  building,  or  where  this  is 
not  possible  on  a  separate  floor,  preferably  at  the 
top  of  the  house,  or  in  a  wing  into  which  the  other 
inhabitants  do  not  enter.  It  has  been  suggested 
that  the  infective  agent  being  a  material  body  will 
tend  to  faU  downwards  by  the  law  of  gravitation, 
and  that  therefore  patients  should  not  be  isolated 
at  the  top  of  a  house.  This  seems  to  be  a  somewhat 
academic  point.  Practically,  isolation  at  the  top 
of  a  house  is  more  convenient  and  likely  to  be  more 
thorough,  and  owing  to  their  lightness  infective 
organisms  are  just  as  likely  to  be  carried  upwards  by 
draughts  as  downwards  by  gravitation. 

The  room  or  ward  should  contain  no  unnecessary 
furniture ;  boards  should  be  bare,  and  there  should 
be  no  hangings  or  curtains  except  what  may  be  neces- 
sary for  darkening  the  room.  The  nurses  should  not 
mix  with  the  other  inhabitants  of  the  house,  and 
when  going  out  for  exercise  should  change  their 
outer  garments.  Visitors  should  only  be  allowed  in 
the  room  under  conditions  to  be  determined  by  the 
medical  man  in  charge.  In  cases  of  scarlet  fever  it 
is  usual  and  advisable  for  the  doctor,  and  any  other 
person  allowed  to  visit  the  patients,  to  wear  a  wash- 
able overall,  which  is  kept  in  the  infected  quarters. 


16      INFECTIOUS   DISEASES   IN  SCHOOLS 


Nothing  should  be  taken  out  of  the  sick  room  or  sick 
quarters  without  thorough  disinfection;  all  slops, 
remains  of  food,  and  refuse  of  all  descriptions  should 
be  disinfected  before  they  are  emptied  into  the  drains, 
and,  wherever  possible,  sohd  articles,  such  as  ragsi 
bandages,  etc.,  should  be  burnt  immediately  after 
use.  No  papers,  books,  or  other  articles  of  per- 
manent value  should  be  allowed  in  the  sick  room, 
as  all  such  things  are  better  burnt  at  the  end  of  the 
illness,  and  are  Hable  to  damage  if  attempts  are  made 
to  disinfect  them.  When  patients  are  sufficiently 
convalescent  to  go  out  of  doors,  they  should  only  be 
allowed  to  do  so  if  they  can  go  straight  from  the  sick 
room  into  the  open  air,  without  passing  through  the 
house.  During  their  walks  they  should  be  accom- 
panied by  a  nurse,  who  will  see  that  they  do  not 
come  in  contact  with  other  persons. 

With  regard  to  isolation  it  is  only  fair  to  say, 
however,  that  at  present  it  has  more  practical  utility 
than  theoretical  justification.  It  is  no  doubt  possible 
to  nurse  a  great  many  of  the  infectious  diseases  in 
the  same  ward  with  other  patients,  or  at  any  rate 
in  a  ward  in  which  the  different  patients  are  only 
partially  separated  by  such  physical  barriers  as  walls 
and  solid  partitions.  Typhoid  is  often  nursed  in 
the  general  wards  of  hospitals,  and  until  recently 
diphtheria  was  so  treated  in  many  institutions 
without  bad  results  ;  many  other  infections  such  as 
measles,  mumps,  and  scarlet  fever  may  be  similarly 
managed.  But  the  degree  of  care  necessary  for  the 
successful  carrying  out  of  such  an  arrangement  is 
great,  and  under  the  present  conditions  the  isolation 
of  infectious  patients  is  simpler  and  less  Ukely  to 
break  down  in  ordinary  practice. 

3.  Disinfection. — ^This  is  apphed  to  the  patient,  at 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  17 


the  end  of  his  attack,  to  the  room  or  building  in  which 
he  has  been  nursed,  and  to  various  articles  which 
have  been  used  by  him  or  by  those  nursing  him 
during  the  attack  of  infectious  disease. 

Before  describing  in  detail  the  methods  of  disinfec- 
tion usually  adopted,  I  should  like  to  make  a  few 
general  remarks  on  the  rationale  of  this  procedure. 
In  the  first  place,  we  must  remember  that  of  the 
common  acute  infectious  diseases  of  this  country 
the  causal  germ  is  known  in  only  a  few  Thus  they 
may  be  divided  into  three  groups, — 

(i)  Those  in  which  the  causal  agent  is  well  known  : 

diphtheria,  a  bacillus 

typhoid  fever,  a  bacillus 

impetigo,  cocci 

cerebro-spinal 


menmgitis 


a  coccus. 


(2)  Those  in  which  the  causal  agent  is  known  with 
some  degree  of  certainty  : 

whooping  cough,  a  bacillus 
mumps,  a  coccus  (?) 

smallpox,  a  protozoon  (?) 

(3)  Those  in  which  the  causal  agent  is  not  known  : 
scarlet  fever,  chicken  pox,  measles,  rubella,  epidemic 
poHomyehtis,  glandular  fever. 

I.  In  the  first  of  these  groups,  disinfection  can  be 
scientifically  carried  out.  Special  methods  can  be 
adopted  to  ascertain  whether  the  patient  is  free 
from  the  organism  or  not,  and  definite  measures 
taken  to  rid  him  of  it  in  the  latter  eventuality.  It  is 
known  on  what  articles,  used  by  or  for  the  patient 
the  organism  is  likely  to  be  found,  and  what  mean^ 
will  effectually  destroy  it.  The  secretions  of  the 
throat  and  nose  in  diphtheria  and  cerebro-spinal 
menmgitis,  the  stools  and  urine  in  typhoid,  and  the 

2 


18      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

skin  lesions  in  impetigo  can  all  contaminate  things 
brought  near  to  them,  but  on  these  objects  the 
organisms  do  not  long  survive,  especially  in  a  dry 
state  ;  probably  the  most  long  lived  are  the  cocci 
causing  impetigo. 

The  disinfection  of  rooms  has  very  little  place  in 
these  diseases,  nor  would  antiseptic  baths  have  any 
appreciable  effect  in  diminishing  the  infectivity  of 
a  patient  in  whom  the  germs  still  existed.  Diph- 
theria bacilli  have  been  found  on  the  walls  of  rooms 
in  which  diphtheria  patients  have  been  nursed,  but 
they  are  mostly  deposited  in  the  earlier  stages  of 
the  disease,  and  die  before  the  patient  is  con- 
valescent. In  the  larger  proportion  of  cases  they 
are  not  found  at  all  on  walls.  Typhoid  bacilli,  when 
due  care  is  taken  in  nursing  the  patient,  should 
not  be  present  on  the  waUs  or  floors  of  rooms,  and 
the  wards  of  general  hospitals  are  not  disinfected 
after  typhoid  patients  are  discharged. 

2.  With  regard  to  the  second  group,  our  know- 
ledge is  less  certain.  It  is  only,  however,  in  the  case 
of  smaUpox  that  the  virus  is  capable  of  marked 
dissemination  into  the  air  surrounding  the  patient, 
and  is  able  to  survive  for  any  considerable  time.  In 
a  well  known  case  the  virus  of  whooping  cough 
survived  on  a  third  person  for  at  least  twenty-four 
hours. 

3.  With  regard  to  the  third  group,  we  are  practi- 
cally fighting  in  the  dark  against  an  unknown 
enemy.  The  virus  of  epidemic  pohomyehtis  is 
smaller  than  any  organism  which  can  be  observed 
under  the  microscope.  A  number  of  such  organisms 
are  now  known  ;  one  which  produces  yellow  fever 
is  transmitted  by  a  species  of  mosquito,  or  by  the 
blood  of  an  infected  person,  but  not  otherwise. 


THE    SPECIFIC    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  19 

When,  therefore,  we  adopt  a  number  of  disinfecting 
methods  in  the  diseases  of  this  group,  we  are  going  on 
the  shot-gun  principle,  hoping  that  one  of  the  many 
small  pellets  will  hit  the  mark.  What  we  know, 
however,  of  the  diseases  in  which  the  organism  can 
be  traced,  makes  it  probable  that,  in  time,  many  of 
these  methods  will  be  discarded  as  superfluous.  The 
virus  will  be  shown  in  many  cases  to  be  incapable 
of  long  survival  outside  the  body  when  exposed  to 
light  and  air ;  and  very  likely  special  methods  for 
its  transmission  will  be  definitely  determined  in  each 
case.  In  the  meantime  the  elaboration  with  which 
disinfection  should  be  carried  out  must  be  determined 
by  the  seriousness  of  the  disease.  In  scarlet  fever 
and  diphtheria,  for  instance,  which  are  the  most 
serious  of  all  common  infections  in  schools,  no 
precaution  should  be  omitted.  In  chicken  pox  and 
rubella  a  very  ordinary  degree  of  care  and  cleanliness 
will  suffice. 

(«).  The  patient  is  usually  disinfected  by  means 
of  one  or  more  warm  baths,  with  plenty  of  scrubbing 
and  soap,  followed  by  sponging  over  with  an  anti- 
septic solution,  such  as  Izal  i  in  200. 

After  the  last  bath  the  patient  puts  on  entirely 
fresh  non-infected  clothes,  those  he  had  worn  during 
his  convalescence  being  removed  from  the  bathroom 
before  he  is  out  of  the  bath.  He  then  leaves  the 
infected  quarters  immediately. 

{b).  The  disinfection  of  the  ward  or  building  is,  in 
large  towns,  usually  carried  out  by  the  sanitary 
authority.  Thorough  scrubbing  and  cleaning  of 
floors  and  walls  should  be  carried  out  after  all  cases 
of  infectious  disease,  and  in  the  more  serious  ones 
the  full  routine  is  necessary.  After  articles  to  be 
otherwise  dealt  with,  such  as  bedding,  crockery, 


20       INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


etc.,  have  been  removed,  the  room  is  first  fumigated 
with  sulphur  or  formahn.  Sulphur  can  be  merely 
pounded  up  and  burnt  in  an  iron  saucer  suspended 
over  a  bucket  of  water  to  obviate  the  danger  of  fire, 
or  the  more  convenient  sulphur  candles  may  be 
employed.  In  any  case  all  cracks  and  orifices  should 
be  sealed  up  as  securely  as  possible,  and  all  cupboards, 
etc.  opened,  before  fumigation  begins.  The  walls 
and  floors  should  be  wetted  and  the  air  rendered 
thoroughly  moist.  The  presence  of  curtains  and 
hangings  m  a  room  considerably  impairs  the  efficacy 
of  this  form  of  fumigation.  Two  or  three  pounds  of 
sulphur  must  be  allowed  for  every  i,ooo  cubic  feet 
of  air-space.  Often  the  room  is  left  for  twenty-four 
hours,  by  which  time  it  will  usually  be  possible  to 
enter  it,  but  after  three  hours  the  windows  may  be 
opened  if  the  person  entering  the  room  protects  his 
face  with  a  towel  soaked  in  a  solution  of  washing 
soda. 

Sulphur  has  the  disadvantage  of  damaging  cer- 
tain articles,  notably  pohshed  metals,  such  as  gas 
fittings,  window  fasteners,  etc.    In  its  place  formal- 
dehyde gas  (the  commercial  solution  of  which  is 
known  as  formahn)  may  be  employed.  The  Alformant 
lamp  is  a  convenient  way  of  fumigation  by  formahn 
in  small  rooms.    Thirty  tablets  are  used  for  every 
1,000  cubic  feet.    The  air  must  be  moist  and  the 
temperature  not  under  60°  Fahrenheit.    The  usual 
period  of  fumigation  is  4  hours.    For  large  rooms 
the  apparatus  known  as  Trillet's,  or  the  more  con- 
venient Lingner's,  must  be  employed.    The  former 
method  at  any  rate,  can  only  be  carried  out  by 
sanitary  authorities.    After  any  form  of  fumigation 
thorough  ventilation  of  the  room  must  take  place, 
in  itself  a  valuable  proceeding.    The  floors,  etc., 


THE   SPECIFIC   INFECTIOUS   DISEASES  21 

are  then  scrabbed  with  a  disinfectant  solution,  such 
as  I  in  100  Izal,  CylHn,  or  Cresol.  Papers  should 
be  scraped  off  the  walls,  the  ceilings  hme-washed,  and 
the  walls  if  unpapered  sprayed  with  2  per  cent 
formalin  solution  or  washed  with  one  of  the  disin- 
fectants used  for  the  floors.  In  Germany  the  walls 
are  first  rubbed  over  with  breadcrumbs,  which  are 
subsequently  swept  up  and  burnt,  and  then  sprayed 
with  carbolic  acid  solution  i  in  100. 

(c).  Bedding,  clothes  and  materials  generally  must 
be  disinfected  by  steam  generated  under  pressure  in 
a  special  apparatus.  Leather  articles,  such  as  boots, 
which  are  damaged  by  steam,  must  be  exposed  to 
sulphur  or  formahn  when  the  room  is  fumigated. 
Sheets  and  Hnen  articles  may  be  disinfected  by 
soaking  in  carbolic  acid  solution  i  in  25  to  i  in  50, 
Izal  I  in  100  to  i  in  200,  or  Cyllin  i  in  150  to  i  in  300 
for  an  hour.  They  may  then  be  wrung  out  and  sent 
to  the  wash.  Crockery,  glass  ware  and  enamelled 
metal  ware  may  be  placed  in  water  and  boiled  for 
fifteen  minutes.  In  some  cases  it  is  necessary  to  dis- 
infect the  stools  of  patients.  This  is  done  by  pouring 
on  to  them  i  or  2  pints  of  i  in  40  carbohc  acid,  Lysol 
or  Cresol.  The  mass  is  thoroughly  mixed,  covered 
up  and  allowed  to  stand  for  at  least  one  hour.  It 
may  then  be  disposed  of  in  the  usual  way.  Urine 
may  be  similarly  treated,  being  mixed  with  an  equal 
bulk  of  the  disinfectant  solution. 

4.  Quarantine.— Omng  to  the  fact  that  infectious 
fevers  present  no  symptoms  till  after  the  "  incubation 
period  "  proper  to  each  has  elapsed,  it  is  impossible 
to  say  whether  a  person  exposed  to  infection  will 
develop  the  disease  or  not  until  a  certain  time  has 
expired  and  the  characteristic  features  begin  to 
appear.    When  therefore  definite  exposure  to  an 


22       INFECTIOUS   DISEASES   IN  SCHOOLS 

infectious  disease  has  occurred,  those  who  may 
develop  it  should  be  prevented  from  mixing  with 
others  until  it  becomes  known  whether  or  not  they 
have  taken  the  infection.  In  practice  it  is  usual  to 
allow  a  few  days  over  the  longest  incubation  period, 
in  order  to  give  a  margin  for  safety,  and  this  is  called 
the  quarantine  period.  The  term  quarantine  there- 
fore should  not  be  applied  to  a  patient  who  is  isolated 
because  he  has  an  infectious  complaint ;  it  should  be 
used  only  to  denote  the  time  during  which  suspected 
persons  are  isolated  and  watched  to  see  if  they  are 
going  to  develop  symptoms.  A  child  is  usually 
placed  in  quarantine,  and  not  allowed  to  attend 
school  if  a  case  of  infectious  disease  has  occurred  in 
the  house  in  which  he  lives,  and  the  period  is  reckoned 
either  from  the  day  the  patient  is  removed  from  the 
house  or  otherwise  completely  isolated,  or  from  the 
day  on  which  the  suspected  individual  is  removed 
from  the  house  in  which  the  case  is  being  nursed. 
The  various  periods  of  quarantine  will  be  stated 
under  their  respective  diseases  in  the  subsequent 
chapters  of  this  book. 

5.  Certificates— These  will  be  dealt  with  later 
(see  pp.  139-140). 

J.  M.  F.-B. 


23 


CHAPTER  II. 
THE    ACUTE  EXANTHEMATA 

THE  acute  exanthemata  belong  to  that  group  of 
infectious  diseases  in  which  the  poison  is 
generated  within  the  human  body,  and  in  the 
course  of  which  there  is  developed  on  the  skin 
and  mucous  membranes  a  rash  characteristic  of 
each  of  them. 

The  poison  is  transmitted  from  one  individual  to 
another,  generally  by  proximity,  but  also,  in  some 
of  them,  by  fomites  or  articles  of  food  such  as 
milk  or  water.  Direct  contact  or  inoculation  is 
not  necessary. 

An  individual  who  has  been  attacked  by  one  of 
them  is  not,  as  a  rule,  subject  to  a  second  attack  of 
the  same  disease.  The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are 
very  few  and  may,  in  practice,  be  disregarded.  An 
attack  of  one  of  them  does  not,  however,  protect  an 
individual  from  the  other  members  of  the  group. 
On  the  contrary  it  seems  to  render  him  more  sus- 
ceptible to  the  poison  of  the  others. 

Two  or  more  infectious  diseases  may  run  their 
course  concurrently  in  the  same  individual.  The 
experience  of  the  fever  hospitals  shows  that  this  is 
far  from  uncommon.  The  opinion  is  generally  held 
that  there  are  no  modifications  of  the  characters  of 
one  disease  by  the  co-existence  within  the  body  of 
another ;  and  that  there  is  no  interference  with  the 
incubation  period  of  either.    The  following  case  is 


24      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


evidence  to  the  contrary.  A  boy  returned  to  school 
on  May  6th,  having  been  to  a  place  of  public  enter- 
tainment on  the  previous  day.  On  the  gth  he  was 
found  to  have  a  copious  scarlatinal  rash,  and  was  at 
once  isolated  in  a  room  at  the  sanatorium  which  had 
not,  previously,  been  used  for  any  other  disease.  The 
scarlatina  ran  an  ordinary  uncomplicated  course, 
the  fever  being  rather  prolonged  ;  convalescence 
was  reached  on  the  twelfth  day,  the  temperature 
remaining  normal  for  the  next  ten  days.  Then,  on 
the  22nd  day  from  his  isolation,  the  temperature 
again  rose  rapidly,  and  an  eruption  of  chicken  pox 
appeared  on  his  body.  The  attack  was  very  severe 
and  the  temperature  reached  104°  on  four  successive 
evenings. 

In  this  case  the  incubation  period  of  the  chicken- 
pox  was  certainly  not  less  than  twenty-two  days  and 
was  probably  twenty-six,  as  the  patient  most  likely 
received  the  poison  of  both  diseases  on  the  occasion 
of  his  visit  to  London. 

The  diseases  of  this  group,  which  will  be  considered 
here,  are  Measles,  Rubella,  Scarlet  Fever,  and 

Chicken  Pox. 

They  present  certain  features  in  common.  In 
each  of  them,  after  the  reception  of  the  poison,  there 
is  a  period  of  latency  while  the  poison  is  multiply- 
ing— period  of  incubation,  during  which  there  are 
no  obvious  manifestations  of  disease  ;  this  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  period  of  somewhat  indefinite  symptoms 
-prodromal  period  ;  after  which  the  characteristic 
rash  appears  and  runs  its  comse—exanthemic  period  ; 
to  this  succeed  the  periods  of  defervescence  and 
convalescence. 

Rashes  are  described,  according  to  their  character- 
istics, in  the  following  terms 


THE   ACUTE  EXANTHEMATA 


25 


^   ■  u 
N 

J 

11  1  1 

Mil 

MM 

MM 

1  11 1 

3 

1  1  t  1 

1  1  II 

11  1  1 

MM 

U]X 

Irs  " 
«^  J 

1 

1  1  1  1 

iTTr 

-4^ 

II  II 

MM 

MM 

1  llT 

Tm- 

■44-iJ_ 

1  1  1  1 

11  1  1 

1  1  1  1 

11  1 

to 

Tttt 

MM. 

"  - 

(■  1  1  w 

-4-Ul 

^111 

MM 

— 7- 

1 1 1 1 

c 

1 1 II 

t  M  1 

1  II  1 

1  1  II 

1  1  1  1 

"  - 

«^  = 

J 

11 11 

1  II 1 

1  1  1  1 

1  1  1 

1  II  1 

^  u 

J 

,1111 

1 II 1 

1  1  1  1 

1  1  11 

111  1 

MM 

r 

^    I  1  I 

E 

1 1 1 1 

II  1 1 

II  II 

11  1  1 

1  II  1 

N 

J  ^ 

1 1 II 

1  1  1  1 

1  1  1  1 

1  1  1  1 

< 

MM 

L 

3 

J 
E 

II 11 

1 1 1  r 

II  1  1 

1  1  1  1 

1  11  1 

lr-> 

b 

: 

lJ 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

MM 

1  1  1  1 

: 

J 
E 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1  1  1  1 

inM_ 

,  1  1^ 

IMP 

L 

: 

J 
E 

1 1 1 1 

Jill 

1  11  1 

1  11  1 

t " 

rsl  ' 

J 
r 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1  1  11 

1 1  iT 

H^M 

1  1 

1 1 1 

b 

^  .. 

Li 

F 

1 1 1 1 

1 1  iT 

1' ' ' ' 

MM 

)  1 

1 1.1 

L 

J            ^  ^ 

MM 

1 1 1 1 

iTTr 

1 1 1 

a> 

J 

F 

gusb'  uc 

1 1 1 

CO 

J 

1  1  1  1 

E 

\  t  iT 

-XJJI 

1  1  II 

'  1  1  M 

1 1 1 

N 

J        ^  ^ 
E 

1 1 1 1 

Mil 

1  1  1  1 

MM 

CO 

I  UOI 

i 

MM 

1 1 1 

1  1   1  1 

E 

1  1  1  1 

MM 

II  11' 

MM 

1  II  1 

1 1 1 

^ 

E 

1  1  II 

iiTr 

1  1  1  1 

MM 

Id 

1   1    1  1 

INI 

11  II 

MM 

MM 

1 1 1 

N 

II  1  1 

MM 

MM 

MM 

1  1  II 

1 

Ul 

Mil 

II  II 

'mm 

MM 

Mil 

MM 

DAY  OF 
DISEASE 

—  -'  1  1  1  1 

u  •«■.<" 

I 

F 

-  •  r-TTT 

S 

r  1  1  T 

to 
3 

-   1  T-^  r 

1  1   1   T  1 

2 

1 

«  « 

31  -a 
35  1 

00 

0) 

26      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


Erythematous,  consisting  of  a  superficial  inflam- 
mation of  the  skin,  with  redness,  slight  swelling,  and 
often  some  desquamation.  An  erythema  is  said  to 
be  Punctate,  when  it  presents  the  appearance  of 
rninute  red  points,  situated  on  a  less  brilHantly  red 
background. 

Macular,  consisting  of  spots  or  blotches  of  various 
tints,  circular,  oval  or  irregular  in  shape,  and  slightly 
raised  above  the  skin. 

Papular,  consisting  of  small,  soHd,  somewhat 
pointed  sweUings  of  the  skin,  varying  in  size  from  a 
pin's  head  to  a  pea. 

Vesicular,  consisting  of  small  raised  bladders, 
containing  clear  fluid  derived  from  the  serum  of  the 
blood. 

Pustular,  consisting  of  small  globular  or  conical 
elevations  of  the  skin,  usually  surrounded  by  a  red 
margin,  and  containing  matter  or  pus.  Vesicles 
often  become  pustular. 

Urticarial,  consisting  of  indurated  wheals  raised 
on  the  surface  of  the  skin,  which  are  white  at  the 
top  and  red  at  the  edges  ;  they  itch  very  much,  and 
come  and  go,  sometimes  several  times  a  day. 

Though  each  of  the  exanthemata  has  a  character- 
istic eruption  which  aids  in  distinguishing  one  from 
the  other,  similar  rashes  may  be  produced  by  other 
causes,  and  it  is  not  possible  to  diagnose  an  infectious 
fever  by  the  appearance  of  the  rash  alone. 

Certain  drugs,  e.g..  Belladonna,  many  of  the 
Balsams,  Morphia  and  Quinine,  occasionally  produce 
rashes,  usually  of  the  urticarial  type,  but  sometimes 
having  a  scarlatinal  or  measly  appearance. 

Some  articles  of  food,  e.g.,  mushrooms,  eggs,  straw- 
berries, shell-fish,  etc.,  produce  rashes  in  susceptible 
individuals. 


THE   ACUTE  EXANTHEMATA 


27 


The  serum  used  in  antitoxin  inoculations  frequently 
produces  rashes  of  various  sorts,  some  hke  scarlatina 
and  some  like  measles.  They  appear  from  seven  to 
fourteen  days  after  the  injection,  and  are  often 
accompanied  by  some  fever  and  other  S3miptoms  of 
illness.  The  rash  usually  makes  its  first  appearance 
at  the  seat  of  injection. 

The  use  of  enemata,  especially  if  hard  soap  is 
used,  is  not  uncommonly  followed  by  the  appearance 
of  a  rash.  This  sometimes  takes  the  form  of  a 
punctate  erythema,  not  unlike  the  rash  of  scarlatina  ; 
usually  the  backs  of  the  wrists  are  the  first  to  be 
affected. 

Boys  who  handle  caterpillars  or  the  cocoons  of 
certain  species  of  moths,  get  a  rash  on  their  hands, 
which  can  be  transferred,  by  rubbing,  to  other 
parts  of  the  body.  The  eyes  are  specially  liable 
to  be  affected,  becoming  swollen,  red  and  watery, 
thus  simulating  rubella  or  measles  in  their  early 
stages. 

The  most  common  of  the  above  species  are,  the 
Gold  tail*  (P.  similis),  the  Vapourer  (0.  antigua), 
the  common  Tiger  or  Woolly  Bear  [A.  caia),  the 
Lackey  (M.  neustria),  the  Oak  Eggar  {B.  quercus), 
the  Fox  moth  [B.  rubi),  the  Drinker  (C.  potatoria). 

Contact  with  certain  plants,  especially  those 
belonging  to  the  Primula  group,  e.g.,  Primula 
obconica,  is  capable  of  setting  up  irritant  rashes. 

The  rash  of  idiopathic  rose-rash  closely  simulates 
that  of  the  infectious  variety,  and  a  diagnosis  between 
the  two  may  be  impossible.    The  idiopathic  variety, 

*  The  Gold  tail  is  also  known  as  Liparis  Auriflua,  and 
in  the  North  of  England  as  the  Palmer  worm.  Possibly 
the  moth  is  irritant  also,  especially  when  freshly  emerged 
from  the  cocoon. 


28      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


however,  is  frequently  patchy,  disappearing  from  one 
place  and  appearing  in  another. 

It  is  well  to  remember  that  a  brush,  vigorously 
applied  to  the  skin  of  the  chest  or  elsewhere,  will 
produce  a  rash  not  unlike  that  of  rubella.  This  is 
only  local,  and  confined  to  the  parts  which  have 
been  treated. 

H.  G.  A. 


29 


CHAPTER  III. 

MORBILLI.  MEASLES. 

French :  Rougeole.     German  :  Masern. 

MEASLES  is  an  acute  infectious  disease,  of  which 
the  characteristic  symptoms  are  catarrh  of  the 
respiratory  passages,  a  pecuhar  rash  on  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  mouth,  and  a  blotchy  eruption  on 
the  skin.  Its  geographical  distribution  is  very  wide, 
for  measles  occurs  in  every  portion  of  the  civilized 
world,  though  certain  districts  have,  at  times, 
remained  free  from  it  for  a  considerable  period. 

Though  we  have  no  certain  knowledge  of  its 
antiquity,  it  was  probably  known  to  the  early 
Arabian  writers,  but  it  was  not  separated  from 
scarlet  fever,  and  described  as  an  independent 
disease,  till  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century ; 
and  it  was  not  till  towards  the  end  of  the  last  century 
that  the  distinction  was  estabhshed  between  true 
measles  and  the  disease  now  known  as  rubella,  and 
popularly  caUed  German  measles. 

Measles  never  entirely  dies  out,  but  persists  as  an 
endemic  disease,  which  at  intervals  bursts  forth  into 
epidemic  form.  The  length  of  the  intervals  between 
epidemics  is  to  a  great  extent  determined  by  the 
number  of  susceptible  individuals — ^i.e.,  unprotected 
by  a  previous  attack — ^who  are  added  to  a  community. 
Experience  in  large  schools  of  four  or  five  hundred 
boys  shows  that,  when  the  number  of  those  thus 


30      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


unprotected  reaches  one  third  of  the  total  number,  an 
outbreak  may  be  looked  for. 

Susceptibility  to  the  contagion  of  measles  is  almost 
universal,  and  owing  to  this  it  is  almost  entirely  a 
disease  of  childhood.    In  England,  in  the  elemen- 
tary schools,  84  per  cent  of  the  children  have  been 
attacked  before  reaching  the  age  of  ten  years;  in 
the  preparatory  and  public  schools,  35  per  cent 
have  been  attacked  before  the  age  of  nine,  68  per 
cent  before  fourteen,  and  at  the  termination  of  the 
school  period  not  more  than  3  per  cent  have 
escaped.    It  has  been  found,  however,  that  when 
introduced  into  districts  from  which  it  has  been 
absent  for  a  considerable  period,  measles  attacks 
both  old  and  young  indiscriminately,  and  the  older 
people  suffer  most  severely.    This  was  the  ex- 
perience in  the  Faroe  Islands,  when  the  disease 
was  introduced  in  1846,  after  an  absence  of  sixty- 
five  years.    Panum  states  that  6000  out  of  a  popula- 
tion of  7782  were  attacked.    Similar  observations 
have  been  reported  from  Mauritius,  Iceland  and  Fiji. 
In  these  outbreaks  the  mortality  was  very  large, 
which  gives  some  reason  to  suppose  that,  in  districts 
where  epidemics  constantly  recur,  there  is,  to  some 
extent,  a  transferred  immunity  from  parent  to  child, 
leading  to  a  milder  type  of  the  disease.    The  opposite 
to  this  is  also  true,  for  there  seems  in  some  families 
to  be  a  certain  hereditary  transmission  of  a  pre- 
disposition in  their  children  to  a  special  severity  of 
type. 

The  infection  of  measles  is,  in  almost  all  cases, 
contracted  by  direct  personal  intercourse.  There  is 
very  little,  if  any,  positive  evidence  that  it  can  be 
conveyed  by  intermediaries  or  by  fomiies,  such  as 
articles  of  clothing  or  utensils ;  on  the  other  hand, 


MORBILLL  MEASLES 


31 


the  evidence  to  the  contrary  is  very  strong.  The 
poison  is  given  off  from  the  affected  person  during 
the  prodromal  stage,  before  the  characteristic  eruption 
has  appeared,  during  the  eruptive  stage,  and  possibly 
for  some  days  after  the  rash  has  disappeared  :  the 
secretions  from  the  eyes,  nose,  mouth,  and  respiratory 
passages  being  the  principal  vehicles.  The  poison  is 
air-borne  to  a  limited  distance.  Observations  made 
in  cases  where  infection  has  spread  during  the  time 
of  attendance  in  chapel,  indicate  that  the  outside 
range  is  twelve  feet,  but  the  great  majority  of  those 
infected  were  found  to  have  been  within  six  feet  of 
the  focus. 

Though  it  is  practically  certain  that  measles  is  due 
to  a  specific  micro-organism,  its  nature  is  as  yet 
unknown. 

Incubation. — From  the  time  of  the  reception  of  the 
poison  till  the  appearance  of  the  characteristic 
eruption  on  the  skin,  a  fairly  definite  period  of  from 
thirteen  to  fifteen  days  elapses.  This  period  is 
divided  into  two :  the  incubation  stage  and  the 
prodromal  stage  ;  that  of  incubation  usually  lasting 
ten  days,  of  prodromal  three  days;  but  this  is 
liable  to  variation. 

The  stage  of  incubation  presents  no  easily 
recognisable  symptoms,  though  complaint  may  be 
made  of  lassitude  and  general  indisposition. 
Meunier,  a  French  physician,  has,  however,  called 
attention  to  a  peculiar  alteration  of  weight  which  is 
known  as  Meunier' s  sign.  He  says,  "  There  exists 
during  the  stage  called  incubation  of  measles  a 
phenomenon  which  we  have  constantly  observed, 
and  which  consists  in  a  marked  lowering  of  the  body 
weight.  It  begins  about  the  fourth  or  fifth  day 
after  contagion,  that  is  to  say  five  or  six  days  before 


32      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


the  appearance  of  the  first  catarrhal  or  febrile 
symptoms,  eight  or  ten  days  before  the  eruption. 
It  lasts  several  days,  more  often  even  to  the  beginning 


Day 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

g 

g 

10 

// 
ft 

to 

/■f 

SSl:  81 

t 

 7 

-s- 

\i 

-  f 

o 

r 

5 

u 

b- 

o- 

-03- 
V. 

4 

to 
o 

tri 

C- 
Oj 

3 

8- 

•0 

..  2. 

— 

Rist 
Fall 

•  of 

(if 

2 

3 

lbs 
Ilia 

■s 

c 

«; 

1 

0 

Fig.  1. — Chart  showing  rise  and  fall  of  weight  in  incubation  of  Measles. 

of  invasion.  The  loss  of  weight  is  about  lo  oz.,  or 
i|  oz.  a  day  in  a  child  of  four  or  five  years ;  it  may 
reach  22  oz.,  and  has  not  been  observed  less  than 
3  oz."    Observations  made  on  the  lines  indicated  by 


Day 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

3 

10 

II 

12 

13 

14 

....  . 
6St-  61b.  f. 

-a 

*• 

Q 

 q 

7 

-5 

% 

6 

0 

ii 

--8- 

t 

si 

> 

5 

A 

:§ 

■s 

4 

"1 
0 

/ 

-c— 

•a 

3 

g-- 

A 

2 

Q 

r 

1 

V 

0 

■Fig.  3- — Chart  showing  rise  and  fall  of  weight  in  Measles. 

Meunier,  show  that  the  weight  rises  during  the 
first  five  or  six  days,  and  then  gradually  falls  as 
shown  in  the  charts  (2  and  3).   The  fall  is  greater 


MORBILLI.  MEASLES 


33 


than  that  stated  by  him,  probably  accounted  for  by 
the  fact  that  the  observations  were  made  on  older 
and  heavier  subjects. 

About  the  sixth  day  the  glands,  especially  those  in 
the  neck  and  armpits,  become  enlarged  ;  not  at  first 
tender,  but  they  usually  become  so  a  day  or  two 
later.  The  swelling  and  tenderness  of  the  glands 
continue  till  the  termination  of  the  fever,  but 
suppuration  rarely  takes  place. 

Prodromal  Stage. — On  the  tenth  day  from  infec- 
tion, in  a  typical  case,  the  period  of  invasion,  or 
prodromal  stage,  is  reached.  In  most  cases  the 
onset  is  sudden,  but  in  some  the  symptoms  develop 
gradually.  Of  these  the  earliest  are  a  moderate 
degree  of  fever,  the  temperature  rising  to  from  ioi° 
to  103°,  running  from  the  eyes  and  nose,  catarrh  of 
the  upper  air  passages,  with  a  troublesome  cough. 
The  patient  presents  the  ordinary  symptoms  of  a 
cold  in  the  head.  During  the  prodromal  stage,  and 
two  or  three  days  before  the  appearance  of  the  rash 
on  the  skin,  a  peculiar  eruption  may  be  seen  on  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth.  This  was  first 
described  by  Flindt  in  his  reports  to  the  Danish 
Board  of  Health,  but  the  credit  of  drawing  attention 
to  its  diagnostic  importance  belongs  to  KopHk  of 
New  York.* 

The  changes  in  the  mouth  appear  in  the  following 
order : — 

On  the  first  day  of  fever  there  is  a  slight  diffuse 
redness  of  the  tonsils. 
On  the  second  day,  the  redness  of  the  tonsils  has 


*  Koplik's  spots  are  not  always  found  ;  their  absence  does 
not  negative  the  diagnosis  of  measles.  In  187  cases,  KopUk's 
spots  were  unmistakably  present  in  169,  absent  in  8,  doubtful 
in  10  (Holt). 

3 


34      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


increased  and  spread  to  the  pillars  of  the  fauces  and 
the  soft  palate;  and  certain  characteristic  spots— 
KopUk's  spots — appear  on  the  mucous  membrane 
lining  the  cheeks.  These  may  usually  first  be  seen 
opposite  the  molar  teeth.  They  consist  of  small 
irregular  spots  of  a  bright  red  colour.  In  the  centre 
of  each  spot  may  be  noted,  in  strong  daylight,  a 


F'ig-.  4. — Temperature  Chart  in  Measles. 


tninute  bluish-white  speck.  These  specks  on  a  red 
background  may  be  regarded  as  diagnostic  of 
measles,  for  they  occur  in  no  other  disease.  The 
gums,  also,  show  evidence  of  congestion,  are  red, 
injected,  and  slightly  swollen,  being  covered  with  a 
white  patchy  scum,  which  may  readily  be  removed. 
The  tongue  is  covered  by  white  fur,  its  edges  are 
red,  and  the  papillae  enlarged. 


MORBILLI.  MEASLES 


35 


On  the  third  day,  the  rash  in  the  mouth  has  become 
more  intense.  The  soft  palate  is  entirely  covered 
and  the  hard  palate  involved.  The  Kophk's  spots 
have  greatly  increased  in  number  and  may  be 
observed  on  the  inner  sides  of  the  Hps.  The  eruption 
now  begins  to  appear  on  the  skin. 

During  the  prodromal  stage,  there  is  frequently. 


Fif.  5.— Temperature  Chart  in  Measles. 


on  the  second  or  third  day,  a  remission  of  all  the 
symptoms;  the  temperature  may  fall  to  normal 
or  a  little  above,  while  the  cough  and  catarrh  may 
almost  entirely  disappear.  This  remission  may  often 
give  a  false  sense  of  security  and  the  nature  of  the 
illness  may  be  overlooked.    (Figs.  4  and  5.) 

In  the  stage  of  primary  fever,  evanescent  rashes 
often  appear  and  disappear  on  the  skin.    The  most 


36      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


common  of  these  is  a  spotty  rash  not  unlike  the 
proper  one  of  the  disease.  In  some  epidemics  a 
general  erythema  on  the  trunk,  similar  to  the  rash 
of  scarlet  fever,  has  been  observed.  Attacks  of 
nettle  rash  are  not  uncommon. 

Eruptive  Stage. — ^The  skin  eruption  of  measles 
appears,  as  a  rule,  first  upon  the  face  near  the  mouth 
and  nose,  or  behind  the  ears,  and  spreads  downwards 
over  the  neck,  chest  and  arms,  and  lastly  over  the 
abdomen  and  lower  extremities.  It  is  not  uncommon, 
however,  for  the  first  appearance  to  be  on  the  neck 
or  the  sides  of  the  chest.  There  is  no  foundation  for 
the  beHef  that  the  severity  of  the  subsequent  attack, 
or  the  liability  to  comphcations,  is  influenced  by  the 
situation  in  which  the  rash  first  makes  its  appearance. 

The  eruption  consists  of  shghtly  elevated,  deep  rosy 
or  dark  red  separate  spots,  scattered  irregularly,  and 
fading  on  pressure.  The  individual  spots  quickly 
increase  in  size  and  coalesce  with  one  another  to  form 
crescentic  blotches.  The  rash  continues  to  increase 
for  from  two  to  three  days,  the  blotches  becoming 
continuous  in  many  places,  more  elevated,  and  of  a 
darker  colour.  But  even  at  its  maximum  develop- 
ment, patches  of  unaffected  skin  can  be  seen  con- 
trasting with  the  deep  colour  of  the  rash.  Shortly 
after  attaining  its  maximum,  the  eruption  fades 
rather  quickly  in  the  same  order  in  which  it  appeared, 
leaving  behind  a  yellowish  discoloration,  which  may 
persist  for  some  time.  In  a  proportion  of  cases 
minute  haemorrhages  appear  on  the  skin,  especially  in 
the  flexures  of  the  joints  ;  in  a  few  the  entire  eruption 
becomes  haemorrhagic.  With  the  appearance  of  the 
rash  and  its  increasing  development,  the  temperature 
continues  to  rise  and  may  often  reach,  in  a  case  of 
moderate  severity,  105°.    In  most  cases,  however, 


PLATE  1. 


Fig.  6. — Mkasles  ;  second  day  of  rash.  The  appearance  often 
r<  seinbles  chicken-pox  or  small-pox ;  but  the  features  have  a 
characteristic  bloated  appearance. 


Face  page 


MORBILLI.  MEASLES 


37 


104°  is  not  exceeded.  The  eruption  on  the  skin  and 
the  temperature,  usually  reach  their  maximum 
development  on  the  fifteenth  day  from  infection,  or 
the  sixth  from  the  primary  fever.  Both  then  subside, 
and  a  normal  temperature  is  reached  in  from  two  to 
three  days.  During  the  eruptive  stage  all  the 
symptoms  of  the  prodromal  stage  increase  in  severity. 
The  eyes  become  inflamed  and  there  is  often  great 
intolerance  of  light.  The  cough  is  persistent  and 
troublesome,  and  there  is  catarrh  of  the  upper  air 
passages,  due,  probably,  to  the  downward  spread  of 
the  eruption  from  the  throat.  Often  there  is  a 
moderate  amount  of  bronchitis,  the  respirations 
being  short  and  frequent,  and  there  is  usually  some 
complaint  of  soreness  of  the  throat.  The  pulse  is 
quickened  in  proportion  to  the  temperature.  The 
patient  is  generally  restless,  and  the  sleep  much 
disturbed  by  the  cough.  The  tongue  usually  con- 
tinues furred,  but  occasionally  the  fur  peels  off, 
giving  the  red  appearance  with  enlarged  papillae, 
usually  associated  with  scarlet  fever. 

The  disappearance  of  the  eruption  is  followed  by 
some  desquamation  of  the  skin,  of  a  branny 
description,  which  may  last  a  week  or  more. 

The  above  is  a  picture  of  an  ordinary  typical 
attack  of  measles,  as  seen  in  a  child  of  school  age. 
It  is  hable,  however,  to  some  variations.  The  com- 
mencement of  the  prodromal  stage  may  be  delayed 
till  the  twelfth  or  the  thirteenth  day,  and  the  appear- 
ance of  the  rash  may  also  be  delayed  for  one  or  two 
days.  In  every  epidemic  some  cases  are  seen  of 
very  mild  type,  the  amount  of  fever  being  small  and 
the  eruption  slight  and  evanescent.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  effects  of  the  poison  may  be  profound  and 
the  fever  more  intense  and  prolonged. 


38      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

Compiicaiions.—The  most  important  are  those 
which  affect  the  larynx,  the  lungs  and  the  ears. 

The  extension  of  the  rash  from  the  mouth  to  the 
larynx  may  cause  swelling  of  the  vocal  cords,  with 
symptoms  of  croup,  difficulty  of  breathing,  knd  a 
short  barking  cough,  occurring  in  paroxysms. 

The  bronchial  catarrh,  which  is  common  to  all 
cases  of  measles,  may  develop  into  a  general  bron- 
chitis ;  or  the  lung  may  itself  be  involved  and 
pneumonia,  in  one  of  its  forms,  result.  This,  a  grave 
complication,  may  take  place  at  any  period  of  the 
attack,  even  in  the  prodromal  stage,  but  more 
commonly  at  or  about  the  time  of  the  maximum 
intensity  of  the  fever.  If  the  patient  appears  dull 
and  apathetic,  the  fever  unusually  high  and  remain- 
ing so,  and  if  the  ratio  between  respiration  and  pulse 
is  altered,*  an  oncoming  pneumonia  may  be  feared 
and  its  physical  signs  looked  for. 

Inflammation  may  spread  up  the  Eustachian  tubes 
to  the  middle  ear,  giving  rise  to  pain  and,  possibly, 
abscess.  Occasionally  this  spreads  through  the  bone 
tissue  and  affects  the  brain  and  its  membranes. 

Among  the  rarer  complications  are  various  kinds 
of  paralysis. 

Diarrhoea  is  often  present.  This  varies  greatly  in 
different  epidemics.  In  some  it  is  almost  a  constant 
symptom,  in  others  almost  absent.  It  has  been 
observed  that  in  those  epidemics,  in  which  there  is 
much  diarrhoea,  lung  complications  are  less  common. 

Bleeding  from  the  nose  frequently  occurs.    If  this 


*  The  normal  being  i  to  4  (for  example,  respiration  20  to 
pulse  80  with  a  temperature  of  99°),  the  ratio  in  oncoming 
pneumonia  often  approximates  i  to  3  ;  for  example,  with  a 
temperature  of  104°  the  respirations  rise  to  40,  the  pulse  to 
only  120. — Nothnagel's  EncyclopcBdia,  Translator's  note. 


MORBILLI.  MEASLES 


39 


is  not  severe,  it  may  be  regarded  as  beneficial. 
Patients  often  feel  relief  of  their  general  symptoms 
after  a  moderate  loss  of  blood,  and  it  seems  to 
diminish  the  tendency  to  ear  troubles.  The  bleeding 
may,  however,  be  so  severe  as  to  call  for  special 
treatment. 

Convulsions  not  unfrequently  occur  in  the  pro- 
dromal stage,  especially  in  young  children,  and  are 
not,  necessarily,  of  serious  import.  When  they  occur 
in  the  later  stages  their  significance  is  very  grave. 

Diagnosis. — There  is  little  difficulty  in  detecting  a 
well  marked  case  of  measles,  especially  when  it 
occurs  in  the  course  of  an  epidemic.  The  non- 
specific eruptions,  which  may  be  mistaken  for 
measles  are  referred  to  on  page  26.  They  may  be  dis- 
tinguished, partly  by  the  character  of  the  rash,  but 
more  by  the  absence  of  the  typical  symptoms  of 
the  disease.  The  main  features  distinguishing 
measles,  rubella  and  scarlet  fever  are  set  out  in 
tabular  form  on  page  56. 

Prognosis. — When  the  disease  is  treated  under 
favourable  hygienic  conditions,  the  mortality  is  not 
great.  Fatal  cases  are  almost  always  due  to  lung 
comphcations  or  to  extensions  of  inflammation  from 
the  ears  to  the  brain.  Epidemics  vary  much  in 
their  severity,  and  age  has  a  considerable  influence. 
Before  the  age  of  five  and  after  fifteen  the  tendency 
to  severe  attacks  is  increased. 

Treatment. — An  ordinary  case  of  measles  does  not 
require  much  treatment ;  the  anticipation  and 
prevention  of  comphcations  being  the  most  important. 
The  patient  should  be  put  to  bed  and  kept  there  for 
a  fortnight.  The  room  should  contain  1500  cubic 
feet  of  air-space  ;  if  other  patients  are  treated  in  the 
same  room,  the  floor  area  allotted  to  each  bed  should 


40      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


be  sufficient  to  allow  of  free  ventilation  without  the 
production  of  draughts.  The  temperature  of  the 
room  should  be  kept  at  about  65°.  The  windows 
should  be  shaded,  but  complete  darkness  is  undesir- 
able. Fresh  air  and  sunshme  are  very  beneficial. 
Patients  who  complain  much  of  intolerance  of 
light  may  be  supplied  with  a  shade:  a  suitable 
one  can  be  made  out  of  blue  sugar  paper  to 
which  tapes  are  attached.  Sponging  with  tepid 
water,  to  which  some  mild  disinfectant,  such  as 
Condy's  fluid,  has  been  added,  reheves  the  skin 
irritation  ;  but  baths  during  the  febrile  stage  are 
not  desirable. 

The  diet  should  be  hght,  consisting  of  milk,  eggs 
beaten  up  with  milk,  beef  tea  or  chicken  broth.  To 
relieve  the  thirst,  fluids,  such  as  plain  water,  lemon 
or  barley  water,  may  be  freely  supphed.  Should 
there  be  much  prostration,  small  doses  (two  to  four 
teaspoonfuls)  of  brandy  may  be  added  to  the  milk 
and  egg  mixture. 

For  the  cough,  chlorodyne  and  Friar's  balsam  in 
suitable  doses,  often  gives  rehef .  The  apphcation  to 
the  neck  and  chest  of  a  liniment,  composed  of  goose 
grease,  2  parts ;  soap  liniment,  2  parts ;  and  oil  of 
amber,  i  part,  gives  much  relief,  induces  expectora- 
tion, and  seems  to  avert  lung  complications.  The  use 
of  antiseptic  applications  to  the  mouth,  throat  and 
and  nose  is  very  desirable.  A  solution  of  boric  acid 
(i  or  2  per  cent)  is  suitable,  and  may  be  applied  as 
a  mouth-wash,  a  spray,  or  better  with  a  syringe. 
Gargling  is  inefficient  and  undesirable.  Lozenges 
composed  of  formalin  and  menthol  may  be  frequently 
sucked  ;  they  relieve  the  throat  irritation  and  the 
cough,  and  diminish  the  probabihty  of  ear  compHca- 
tions.    Nose  bleeding  may,  when  necessar}-',  generally 


MORBILLI.  MEASLES 


41 


be  stopped  by  the  injection  of  hot  water  into  the 
nostrils.  Plugging  the  back  of  the  nose  should  be 
done  only  by  the  doctor,  and  should  be  avoided 
unless  absolutely  essential,  as  the  plug  quickly 
becomes  foul,  and  may  set  up  septic  conditions. 

For  diarrhoea,  castor  oil  in  emulsion  is  useful ; 
astringents  should  not  be  used  while  the  motions  are 
unhealthy.  If  there  is  much  laryngeal  trouble  with 
symptoms  of  croup,  the  air  should  be  kept  moist  by 
the  use  of  a  steam  kettle  or  spray,  to  which  a 
teaspoonful  of  Friar's  balsam,  or  a  few  drops  of 
creasote  may  be  added. 

So  far  as  medicine  is  concerned,  a  mixture  con- 
taining acetate  or  citrate  of  potash  is  all  that  is 
required.  The  more  severe  complications  will  require 
special  treatment  adapted  to  each  case.  It  is,  how- 
ever, very  important  to  remember  that  the  pneu- 
monia of  measles  is  itself  an  infectious  complaint. 
Patients  with  this  complication  should  not  be  nursed 
in  the  same  room  as  other  cases. 

During  the  convalescent  stage,  the  patient  should 
have  nourishing  food,  tonics  and  out-door  exercise  in 
suitable  weather  during  the  third  week.  A  dis- 
infecting bath  should  be  taken  each  night. 

Duration  of  Infectiveness. — A  patient  should  be 
regarded  as  infectious  for  three  weeks  from  the 
appearance  of  the  rash. 

H.  G.  A. 


42 


CHAPTER  IV. 

RUBELLA.  ROSE-RASH. 

French:  Rubeole.    German:  Rotheln. 

7DUBELLA  is  an  acute  infectious  disease,  charac- 
terised  by  a  short  prodromal  period,  a  rose- 
red  papular  rash  upon  the  skin,  slight  sore  throat, 
and  marked  enlargement  of  the  glands. 

About  150  years  ago  it  began  to  be  recognised  that 
there  was  an  infectious  eruptive  disease,  differing 
essentially  from  scarlet  fever  and  measles,  although 
somewhat  resembHng  both  in  some  of  its  features. 
Much  doubt  existed  as  to  the  nature  of  the  affection, 
and  for  a  long  time  it  was  regarded  as  a  hybrid 
between  measles  and  scarlet  fever,  but  this  idea  has 
now  been  entirely  abandoned.  In  1875  it  was  accur- 
ately described  in  German  medical  literature  under 
the  name  of  Rotheln,  which  was,  unfortunately, 
translated  into  Enghsh  as  German  Measles.* 

This  has  led  to  much  confusion,  and  the  term 
German  measles  ought  to  be  abandoned,  for  it  cannot 
be  too  strongly  insisted  upon  that  rubella,  measles, 
and  scarlet  fever  are  different  diseases,  each  due  to 
a  separate  and  distinct  poison.  An  attack  of  one 
of  them  does  not  render  an  individual  immune  from 
the  other  two.    The  disease  is  universally  distributed. 


*  In  their  issue  of  the  Nomenclature  of  Diseases,  1905, 
the  Royal  College  of  Physicians  adopted  the  title  of  Rubella 
with  the  synonyms,  German  Measles — Epidemic  Roseola. 


R  U  BELLA .    ROSE-RA  SH 


43 


First  accurately  described  in  Germany,  it  has  received 
attention  from  many  writers  in  England,  France, 
Italy  and  India,  and  it  is  well  recognised  in  both 
North  and  South  America. 

Most  medical  writers  state  that  the  disease  is  most 
prevalent  in  young  children  ;  but  this  appears  to  be 
an  error,  it  being  more  commonly  seen  in  adolescents 
and  young  adults.  From  statistics  obtained  from  a 
number  of  Preparatory  Schools,  it  was  found  that  not 
more  than  5  per  cent  of  their  entrants  had  already 
been  attacked  and,  of  the  entrants  at  the  Pubhc 
Schools,  only  22  per  cent  are  protected  by  a  previous 
attack. 

Epidemics  of  the  disease  are  most  liable  to  prevail 
in  the  late  spring  and  early  summer  months.  The 
disease  is  highly  infectious  and,  in  most,  if  not  in  all 
cases,  is  communicated  by  direct  personal  intercourse. 
There  is  no  evidence  that  the  poison  is  retained  in 
or  conveyed  by  fomites. 

Incubation. — Owing  to  the  insignificance  of  the 
early  symptoms  it  is  not  easy  to  determine  the 
exact  duration  of  the  incubation  period.  In  the 
great  majority  of  cases  it  is  fourteen  days  ;  in  a  few, 
a  day  or  two  more  or  less. 

Eruptive  stage. — After  a  short  prodromal  period, 
not  usually  more  than  twenty-four  hours,  in  which 
there  is  some  headache  and  feehng  of  general  ill 
health,  the  rash  appears  on  the  face,  especially  at 
the  base  of  the  nose  and  round  the  mouth.  From 
the  face  it  quickly  spreads  to  the  neck  and  body,  the 
whole  of  which  may  be  covered  by  the  second  day 
of  the  disease.  The  appearance  of  the  eruption 
presents  three  varieties  :  (i)  Papules,  varying  in 
size  from  a  pin's  head  to  a  small  bean,  sHghtly 
elevated  above  the  skin,  usually  round  or  oval  in 


44      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

shape,  and  of  a  rosy-red  colour.  This  somewhat 
resembles  the  rash  of  measles,  but  the  colour  is 
hghter  and  there  is  not  the  same  tendency  to  the 
formation  of  crescentic  blotches.  (2)  Like  measles 
on  the  face  and  body  and  a  diffuse  erythema  on  the 
Hmbs,  (3)  Erythematous  throughout  and  resembling 
that  of  scarlet  fever,  but  without  the  punctate 
appearance.  The  eyes  are  frequently  suffused  and 
present  a  bright  red  appearance,  but,  usually,  there 
is  no  intolerance  of  light. 

The  glandular  system  is  always  involved ;  the 
glands  in  the  sides  of  the  neck,  at  the  back  of  the  ears, 
and  especially  those  at  the  back  of  the  head  are  en- 
larged and  tender ;  those  in  the  armpits  and  groins 
are  usually  affected  also.  It  is  very  uncommon  for 
the  inflammation  of  the  glands  to  proceed  to  suppura- 
tion and  abscess.  There  is  often  some  complaint  of 
sore  throat,  and  the  tonsils  and  soft  palate  are 
swollen  and  red.  The  respiratory  organs  are  not 
affected,  and  although  there  is  occasionally  some 
cough,  there  is  no  bronchial  catarrh. 

The  amount  of  fever  varies  greatly  in  different 
epidemics.  In  a  few  cases  the  temperature  may  rise 
to  from  103°  to  104°,  but  a  maximum  of  101°  is  more 
usual.  In  a  recent  epidemic  of  two  hundred  cases, 
two  of  them  had  a  temperature  of  103°,  in  25  per 
cent  the  temperature  reached  100°,  and  in  the 
remainder,  it  did  not  reach  that  figure. 

There  is  practically  no  feehng  of  illness,  even  in 
those  cases  in  which  the  temperature  is  raised.  On 
the  third  or  fourth  day  the  rash  has  entirely  dis- 
appeared, some  discoloration  of  the  skin  may  be 
left,  and  there  is,  generally,  some  branny  desquamation 
of  the  skin,  more  copious  in  those  cases  in  which  the 
eruption  has  been  of  the  scarlatiniform  type. 


RUBELLA.  ROSE-RASH 


45 


The  swelling  of  the  glands  may  persist  for  some 
time  after  the  disappearance  of  the  eruption. 

Treatment. — Little  treatment  is  required  during 
the  attack.  The  patient  should  be  kept  in  bed 
during  the  eruptive  period  and  may  then  be  allowed 
out-of-doors.  Tonics,  such  as  Easton's  syrup,  may 
be  useful  during  convalescence. 

Duration  of  Infectiveness. — patient  may  be 
regarded  as  not  infectious  after  eight  or  ten  days 
from  the  appearance  of  the  rash. 

Diagnosis. — ^The  non-specific  eruptions  resembling 
rubella  are  referred  to  on  page  26. 

The  main  features  distinguishing  rubella,  measles, 
and  scarlet  fever  are  set  out  in  tabular  form  on 
page  56. 

H.  G.  A. 


46 


CHAPTER  V. 

SCARLATINA.       SCARLET  FEVER. 

French:  Scarlatine.    German:  Scharlach. 

OCARLET  FEVER  is  a  specific  infectious  disease, 
^  attended  by  inflammation  of  the  tonsils  and 
by  a  punctate  scarlet  eruption,  followed  by  des- 
quamation of  the  skin. 

Although  it  is  probable  that  scarlet  fever  must 
have  existed  long  before  it  was  described  as  a 
separate  disease  by  medical  writers,  the  first  definite 
record,  according  to  Hirsch,  dates  from  1543.  Its 
original  habitat  is  unknown,  but  in  later  times  it 
has  been  confined  principally  to  Europe  and  North 
America. 

Susceptibility  to  the  contagion  of  scarlet  fever  is 
not  nearly  so  universal  as  that  to  measles.  When  it 
was  introduced  into  Thorshaven  in  1873,  only  38  per 
cent  of  the  inhabitants,  who  were  unprotected  by  a 
previous  attack,  were  affected  ;  whereas  99  per  cent 
of  the  unprotected  were  attacked  by  measles  two 
years  later.  In  England,  in  the  elementary  schools, 
12  per  cent  of  the  children  have  been  attacked  before 
reaching  the  age  of  ten  years;  in  the  preparatory 
and  public  schools,  8  per  cent  have  been  attacked 
before  the  age  of  nine,  11  per  cent  before  fourteen, 
and  about  13  per  cent  before  the  termination  of  their 
school  career. 

Age  has  a  considerable  influence.    About  one- 


SCARLATINA.     SCARLET   FEVER  47 

third  of  the  cases  occur  in  children  under  five  years 
of  age  ;  another  third  between  five  and  ten ;  and 
of  the  remainder,  one-half  are  under  fifteen.  No 
age  is  altogether  exempt,  but  cases  over  twenty-five 
are  uncommon. 

Some  individuals  seem  to  have  a  special  immunity 
to  the  disease,  and  although  frequently  exposed  to 
infection,  are  never  attacked.  Sometimes  this  immu- 
nity is  common  to  all  the  members  of  the  same  family. 

One  attack  of  scarlet  fever  confers  immunity  to  a 
second  attack,  which  usually  persists  through  life  ; 
but  second  attacks  in  the  same  individual  occasion- 
ally occur.  The  infection  of  scarlet  fever  is  in  most 
instances  due  to  direct  personal  intercourse.  But 
there  is  no  doubt  that  the  poison  can  be  retained  in 
and  conveyed  by  fomites,  such  as  articles  of  clothing, 
cups,  syringes,  etc.,  used  by  the  sick  ;  books  and 
letters ;  the  clothes  of  doctors  and  nurses ;  and 
articles  of  food.  It  retains  its  vitality  for  a  con- 
siderable period;  and  articles  of  clothing  or  toys, 
which  have  been  put  away,  unexposed  to  light  and 
air,  may  be  sources  of  danger  for  a  long  time.  There 
is  some  doubt  whether  it  is  ever  water-borne,  but 
many  instances  have  been  recorded  of  the  poison 
having  been  conveyed  by  milk.  The  poison  is 
chiefly  air-borne,  but  probably  not  to  a  great 
distance.  Residents  in  the  neighbourhood  of  fever 
hospitals  do  not  appear  to  be  specially  Hable  to 
attack.  The  secretions  of  the  throat  and  nose,  and 
the  particles  detached  from  the  skin,  especially  in 
the  early  stages  of  desquamation,  are  the  principal 
vehicles  of  infection. 

It  is  certain  that  scarlet  fever  is  due  to  a  specific 
micro-organism,  and  various  claims  that  this  has 
been  isolated  and  identified,  have  been  put  forward. 


48      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

These  have  not  yet  been  substantiated,  and  the 
matter  is  still  sub  judice. 

Predisposing  Causes. — Amongst  these  are  a  recent 
attack  of  another  infectious  disease ;  poverty ; 
overcrowding  ;  ill  health  ;  surgical  injuries,  especially 
bums ;  and  operations,  especially  those  on  the 
throat  and  nose,  such  as  the  removal  of  tonsils  or 
adenoids. 

Incubation. — ^The  incubation  period  is,  in  the 
great  majority  of  cases,  less  than  seven  days ;  most 
often  three  or  four  days.  Where  milk  has  been  the 
vehicle  of  infection,  the  period  is  somewhat  shorter, 
averaging  two  or  three  days.  There  seems  some 
reason  to  beheve  that  in  scarlet  fever  as  in  diphtheria, 
the  poison  may  be  received  into  the  body  and  remain 
latent,  probably  in  the  tonsils,  tiU  some  disturbing 
factor,  such  as  ill  health,  accident  or  operation, 
renders  the  individual  more  susceptible  to  its 
development. 

Prodromal  Stage. — In  most  cases  the  attack  develops 
with  rapidity.  For  one  or  two  days  there  may  be 
evidences  of  ill  health,  indicated  by  shivering, 
general  pains,  headache,  furred  tongue,  and  loss  of 
appetite.  The  most  typical  symptoms  are  sore 
throat  and  vomiting,  the  latter  being  specially 
common  in  young  children.  The  sore  throat  is 
indicated  by  difficulty  in  swallowing,  and  by  pain 
and  tenderness  at  the  angles  of  the  jaws.  The 
temperature  quickly  rises  from  ioi°  to  104°.  As  a 
rule  the  severity  of  the  initial  symptoms,  particularly 
as  regards  vomiting,  is  an  indication  of  that  of  the 
subsequent  attack.  Adults  sometimes  complain  of 
sore  throat  for  some  days  previous  to  the  other 
symptoms  of  invasion. 

Eruptive  Stage.— TYit  eruption  is  characteristic. 


SCARLATINA.     SCARLET    FEVER  49 


usually  appearing  within  twenty-four  hours  of  the 
first  symptoms  and  rarely  being  delayed  beyond  the 
second  day.  This  consists  of  two  parts  ;  first  there 
is  a  general  deep  red  blush  (erythema),  and  scattered 
over  it  are  a  number  of  minute,  deeper  red,  slightly 
elevated  spots,  giving  a  peculiar  punctate  appearance. 
Usually  it  is  brightest  on  the  chest,  loins  and  inner 
sides  of  the  arms  and  thighs. 

In  the  flexures  of  the  joints,  especially  in  the  arm- 
pits, elbows  and  groins,  the  punctate  appearance  is 
most  evident.  The  rash  entirely  disappears  on 
pressure  unless,  as  is  often  seen  on  the  neck  and 
flexures  of  the  joints,  there  are  minute  haemorrhages 
(petechiae)  in  the  skin.  The  parts  over  the  collar- 
bones and  breast-bone  are  first  affected,  and  later  the 
trunk  and  hmbs,  the  legs  being  reached  last.  Certain 
portions  of  the  skin  are,  almost  invariably,  unaffected, 
namely  the  face,  scalp,  palms  of  the  hands,  and  soles 
of  the  feet.  The  freedom  of  the  face  from  rash  is  a 
valuable  distinction  between  this  disease  and  rubella. 
The  face  is  often  deeply  flushed,  especially  over  the 
prominences  of  the  cheeks,  and  on  the  second  or 
third  day  appears  to  be  dusted  over  with  a  fine 
white  powder,  giving  the  so-called  powder-and-rouge 
appearance.  The  region  about  the  mouth  is  not 
flushed,  but  is  bloodless  and  pale  (circum-oral  pallor), 
contrasting  vividly  with  the  surrounding  redness. 
The  skin,  where  affected  by  the  rash,  becomes  swollen 
with  effusion,  and  difficulty  may  be  experienced  in 
bending  the  joints.  The  eruption  fades  in  the  same 
order  in  which  it  appeared,  and  with  it  the  sub- 
cutaneous effusion.  In  an  ordinary  well-developed 
case,  it  is  gone  by  the  end  of  a  week,  leaving 
behind  a  yellowish  parchment-like  appearance  of  the 
skin. 


4 


50      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


The  tongue,  during  the  initial  stages,  is  covered 
with  a  thick  creamy  fur  ;  the  papillae  are  enlarged 
and  stand  out  as  red  points  through  the  fur.  Early 
in  the  eruptive  stage  this  begins  to  peel  off  at  the 
tip  and  edges  of  the  tongue,  which  by  the  fourth 
day  presents  a  red  moist  surface,  the  condition 
being  known  as  "  strawberry  tongue."  This,  though 
common  in,  is  not  peculiar  to  scarlet  fever,  as  it  is 
also  seen  in  other  diseases,  by  no  means  rarely  in 
measles.  The  inflammation  of  the  throat  bears  a 
relation  to  the  severity  of  the  general  attack.  In 
the  early  stages  the  tonsils  and  uvula  are  red,  dry, 
and  shining.  Should  the  disease  be  intense,  these 
become  swollen  and  velvety,  and  covered  with  a 
white  secretion  which  may  be  seen  exuding  from  the 
mouths  of  the  follicles. 

The  glands  in  the  neck  are  moderately  enlarged 
and  painful,  in  sympathy  with  the  inflammation  of 
the  throat.  The  temperature,  which  was  raised 
during  the  initial  period,  continues  high,  ioo°  to  104°, 
during  the  eruptive  stage.  With  the  fading  of  the 
rash  the  fever  recedes,  and  the  normal  is  reached  in 
from  five  to  seven  days  from  the  onset  (Fig.  i, 
page  25). 

The  pulse  is  always  accelerated,  much  more  so 
than  is  accounted  for  by  the  amount  of  fever.  The 
disproportion  between  the  pulse  and  temperature 
rates  is  an  important  point  in  distinguishing  between 
scarlet  fever  and  other  eruptive  diseases.  In  the 
early  days  of  convalescence  the  pulse  and  temperature 
may  be  subnormal. 

Desquamation. — ^With  the  subsidence  of  the  febrile 
and  eruptive  symptoms,  a  characteristic  desquama- 
tion of  the  skin  commences,  appearing  first  on  the 
face  in  a  white  powder.    Peeling  may  usually  be 


PLATE  II 


Face  f>ag^e 


SCARLATINA.     SCARLET  FEVER 


first  observed  on  the  ears  and  lips,  but  soon  after- 
wards extends  to  the  neck,  where  it  often  has  a  pin- 
hole appearance.  The  palms  and  soles,  from  which 
the  skin  comes  off  in  flakes  or  scales,  are  the  last 
to  become  free.  The  amount  of  desquamation  is 
usuahy,  but  not  always,  in  proportion  to  the  inten- 
sity of  the  eruption  and  the  swelling  of  the  sub- 
cutaneous tissues. 

Varieties. — Scarlet  fever  varies  more  than  the 
other  eruptive  diseases.  There  are  three  principal 
varieties,  which  have  not  however  any  fixed  line  of 
demarcation. 

1.  Scarlatina  Simplex. — ^The  fever  and  throat 
affection  are  so  shght  that  httle  discomfort  is  felt. 
The  eruption  is  slight  and  transient. 

2.  Scarlatina  Latens. — ^This  also  is  very  mild  and 
sometimes  overlooked,  only  being  recognised  by  the 
sequelae. 

3.  Scarlatina  Maligna. — All  the  symptoms  are  pro- 
nounced ;  the  fever  is  high  and  prolonged  ;  the  throat 
affection  severe,  with,  possibly,  some  sloughing  of  the 
tonsils  ;  a  copious  discharge  from  the  nose  of  clear, 
■««iscid,  irritating  fluid,  which  may  appear  on  the 
second  day  ;  the  rash  is  unusually  livid,  and  haemor- 
rhages (petechiae)  are  common ;  sleeplessness  and 
delirium  ;  a  tendency  to  complications. 

Complications. — ^The  most  common  are  : — 

1.  Inflammation  of  the  ears,  more  especially  in 
cases  where  there  is  much  throat  trouble,  the  inflam- 
mation spreading  up  the  Eustachian  tubes.  This  also 
occurs  in  mild  cases,  especially  in  young  children. 

2.  Inflammation  of  the  kidneys,  indicated  by  the 
passage  of  blood  and  albumin  in  the  urine,  and 
dropsy.  The  appearance  of  albumin  in  the  urine 
during  convalescence  does  not  necessarily  imply 


62      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


that  there  is  inflammation  of  the  kidneys,  for  adoles- 
cents, who  are  the  subjects  of  functional  albuminuria, 
very  frequently  give,  under  these  circumstances,  evi- 
dences of  this  condition.  This  is  also  the  case  during 
convalescence  from  other  infectious  diseases. 

3.  Severe  inflammation  of  glands,  leading  to 
suppuration  and  abscesses. 

4.  Rheumatic  affections  of  the  joints,  usually 
appearing  at  the  end  of  the  first  week.  These  do  not 
differ  from  ordinary  rheumatism,  and  may  give  rise 
to  heart  complications. 

5.  Secondary  rashes,  appearing  towards  the 
termination  of  the  second  week.  These  are  papular 
or  erythematous  in  appearance,  and  are  usually  due 
to  absorption  of  septic  matter  from  the  throat. 

Diagnosis. — well  marked  case  of  scarlet  fever 
presenting  the  features  given  above  can  hardly  be 
mistaken  for  anything  else.  In  mild  and  atypical 
cases  the  diagnosis  may  be  difficult  or  even  impossible. 

From  tonsillitis,  especially  when  it  is  accompanied, 
as  is  often  the  case,  by  some  erythema  of  the  neck 
and  chest,  there  may  be  considerable  doubt  in  draw- 
ing a  distinction.  In  tonsillitis  there  is,  as  a  rule,  no 
vomiting,  the  rash  is  not  punctate,  nor  does  it  spread, 
and  one  tonsil  is  usually  affected  before  the  other ;  the 
tongue  remains  furred  and  does  not  peel.  A  very  high 
initial  temperature  is  rather  in  favour  of  tonsillitis. 

The  non-specific  eruptions  resembling  scarlet  fever 
are  referred  to  at  page  26. 

The  main  features  distinguishing  scarlet  fever, 
rubella,  and  measles  are  set  out  in  tabular  form, 
page  56.  For  those  distinguishing  it  from  diph- 
theria, see  Diphtheria. 

Should  there  be  any  doubt,  it  is  better  to  err  on 
the  safe  side  and  isolate  the  case  "  on  suspicion." 


SCARLATINA.     SCARLET    FEVER  63 


Prognosis— This,  at  the  present  time,  is  favourable  ; 
the  case  mortality  during  the  last  thirty  years  having 
considerably  decreased.  It  must  be  remembered, 
however,  that  history  shows  that  it  is  the  nature  of 
the  disease  to  pass  through  alternate  cycles  of  great 
and  slight  severity.  It  is  by  no  means  improbable 
that  there  will  be  a  recurrence  to  the  severe  type  of 
forty  years  ago. 

Treatment. — ^The  patient  should  be  put  to  bed  in  a 
well  ventilated  room  with  a  capacity  of  not  less 
than  1500  cubic  feet.  Even  a  mild  case  should  be 
kept  in  bed  for  not  less  than  fourteen  days,  the  period 
being  lengthened  according  to  the  severity  of  the 
attack.  The  temperature  of  the  room  should  be 
from  55°  to  60°.  The  body  should  be  sponged  daily 
with  tepid  water  containing  some  mUd  disinfectant. 
In  all  cases  antiseptic  treatment  should  be  given  to 
the  throat  and  nasal  passages.  The  best  antiseptic 
for  this  purpose  is  chlorine  water,  made  in  the 
following  way.  In  a  closely  stoppered  bottle  put 
ten  grains  of  chlorate  of  potash,  and  pour  on  twenty 
drops  of  strong  hydrochloric  acid,  cork  tightly  and 
leave  for  five  minutes  ;  then  add  water,  two  ounces 
at  a  time,  to  twelve  ounces,  replacing  the  stopper 
and  shaking  the  bottle  on  each  addition.  To  this 
some  syrup  may  be  added  before  use,  but  it  is  not 
essential.  In  mild  cases,  this  may  be  used  as  a  spray ; 
in  severe  cases  the  throat  and  nostrils  should  be 
syringed  every  two  or  three  hours  and  the  tonsils 
swabbed  with  cotton-wool  soaked  in  the  solution. 
Garghng  is  quite  ineffective.  The  insufflation  of 
flowers  of  sulphur  on  to  the  throat  after  it  has  been 
thus  treated,  has  a  very  beneficial  effect. 

Mild  cases  need  no  medicine  except  an  ordinary 
febrifuge  mixture  and  purgatives  to  counteract  the 


64      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

constipation  which  is  usually  present.  Salicylate  of 
soda  and  salol  are  valuable  drugs  for  the  treatment 
of  severe  cases,  and  seem  to  have  some  influence  in 
preventing  rheumatic  complications. 

Complicated  and  severe  cases  will  require  special 
treatment  according  to  their  symptoms. 

The  diet  should  be  light,  consisting  for  the  first 
few  days  of  milk,  and  beaten-up  eggs,  arrowroot  and 
cornflour  ;  later,  beef -tea,  broth,  and  meat  jellies 
may  be  added.  Water  or  lemon-water  to  drink,  and 
fruit,  such  as  oranges  or  grapes,  may  be  allowed  at 
any  time.  At  the  termination  of  the  febrile  stage, 
meat,  fish,  poultry,  etc.,  may  be  commenced.  There 
is  no  reason  for  withholding  nitrogenous  food  on  the 
theoretical  ground  that  it  may  induce  kidney  trouble. 

Specific  remedies,  for  the  prevention  of,  or  cutting 
short  attacks  and  diminishing  the  periods  of  infective- 
ness,  have  from  time  to  time  been  suggested.  None 
of  them  stand  the  test  of  time  and  experience. 

Duration  of  Infectiveness. — ^This  is  summed  up  in 
the  Medical  Annual  for  1912  thus  :  "  The  question 
is  frequently  asked,  '  How  long  does  a  scarlet-fever 
patient  remain  infectious  ?  '  It  is  not  so  very  long 
ago  that  the  stereotyped  reply  was,  '  As  long  as  he 
continues  to  peel.'  But  it  is  now  recognised  that 
desquamation  is  not  to  be  taken  as  a  sign  of 
infectivity.  One  may  say  that  scarlatina  is  a 
moderately  infectious  disease  for  two  weeks  after 
the  onset,  but  that  a  majority  of  the  cases  cease  to 
be  infectious  some  time  during  the  second  fortnight, 
so  that  at  the  end  of  the  fourth  week,  only  a  smaU 
percentage  remain  so.  Out  of  this  small  percentage 
some,  including  some  mild  cases,  probably  remain 
infectious  for  several  months,  though  they  are  not 
so  recognisable  by  any  known  method  ;  it  is  possible 


SCARLATINA.     SCARLET    FEVER  55 

a  stiU  smaller  number  retain  the  power  of  infecting 
for  a  much  longer  period,  perhaps  even  as  long  as  a 
year." 

At  present  the  best  working  rule  is  to  regard  every 
case  as  infectious  for  six  weeks,  the  period  bemg 
extended  if  local  affections,  such  as  discharges  from 
the  throat,  nose,  or  open  sores,  make  it  necessary. 

Disinfection  should  in  all  cases  be  thorough.  The 
patient  and  nurse  must  be  completely  isolated. 
Handkerchiefs  and  rags  used  for  wiping  discharges 
should  be  at  once  burnt ;  and  at  the  tennination  of 
the  case,  books,  toys,  games,  etc.,  should  be  dealt 
with  in  the  same  way.  jj  q  ^ 


THE    FOURTH  DISEASE. 

Clement  Dukes  [Lancet,  July  14th,  1900)  has 
suggested  that  there  is  another  infectious  disease,  in 
some  respects  similar  to  both  rubella  and  scarlet  fever, 
but  in  others  differing  from  either.  To  this  he  has 
given  the  provisional  title  of  "The  Fourth  Disease." 

He  says  that  the  principal  characteristics  are : — 
An  incubation  period  of  nine  to  twenty-one  days  ;  a 
short  and  ill-defined  prodromal  stage ;  an  eruption 
somewhat  similar  to  that  of  scarlet  fever,  which  is 
followed  by  desquamation  ;  a  temperature  varying 
from  normal  to  104°  ;  pulse,  if  quickened,  bearing  a 
ratio  to  the  amount  of  fever  ;  throat  red  and  swollen  ; 
glands  universally  enlarged  and  tender ;  tongue 
slightly  furred,  but  not  peehng  and  giving  the 
strawberry  appearance  ;  no  sequelae  or  compHcations  ; 
the  duration  of  the  illness  short ;  the  period  of 
infectivity  not  more  than  twenty-one  days. 

The  suggestion  has  received  the  careful  attention 
of  many  observers,  but  has  not  been  confirmed. 

H.  G.  A. 


56 


INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN    SCHOOLS  57 


(D 


a  2 


CO 


c3 


(D 
CO 


c3 

a;  O  O 


01  M 

-ii  ^ 
§  CO 

IH 

CO  «^ 

§  S  2 


4-' 

o 


o  >~- 
75  c^  ^ 


1  m 

is  ^ 


CO 


1§ 


»-i  -(-> 
4)  ci 

o 


O 

°  ^  ° 

O 

O  (D  H 
H  ^-( 
D 

>  O 
C!  <D  •+-' 


Ij  o 

w 


d  rd 


2?  o  S 


o 

o 

■  o 
3 


PI 

o 

s 

o 
o 

■rH 
4-> 

O  It' 

'P 

O  > 
O  O 


>^ 

u 

> 

o 


> 

ID  -p 


IH 

O 


cr 


c3 

cn 


o 
-(-> 

o 
•43 

Pi 
O 


o 


0) 

>  1 

CO 

d 


O  4J 


O  0) 

tn  , 

O 

3  M  9 


d  CO 


CO 
«-( 


cn 

. 

CO  ^ 

;3 


cd 

p< 

I 

(U 

CO 

O 
W 

<U 


2  & 

03  .  <D 

CO  M 

H? 
.  P<  . 

H  IN 


-d 

Q  to* 

>.  O 


CO     '  -IJ 


a 


c3 

a 

-d  d-i: 

^  O  g3 

pd  o 
M  d  tuo 

w  s.a 

rd  ^ 


•  d  o 

03  . 
4-"  n 

o  0) 

d  >  o 

3  CD  ^ 
fli  o 

>i  d  O 

13  "  ^ 
d 

o3  cu 

^1  ,4J  rQ 


o 
(1) 

d 
pi 

CO 
(U 
CO 

o3 
o 

4-> 

CO 

o 

a 


d  .2 

d  0} 

•-^  a 


;5  d 

^    (U  rd 


d 
o 


CO 

O 

a 


d  <u 

03  4» 


_  d 

rr-1  r"* 


(D  d  ^ 

PhS2  S 
gd  c« 

<! 


a 

^  O 

-^^  8 

2  ^  ^ 

«  P.g 

SI'S 

(U  w  o 

co| 


CO  R 


d  o 

bo  - 

4)  to 

t!  d 
o 

^  CO 

bo  <u 

d  ^ 
•d  u 


O  Vh 

m  g  . 

S  4^  C 
.  .4J   d  4 

o3  t(  d  *■ 
VH  ..-^  f 


o 


Vh 
O 

a 


d 
o 


o 
o 

Vh 


d  ^ 
d  ^ 


CJ 
Vh 

rs 

'to 

d 
o 

CJ 


d 
o 

12; 


d 
d 

o3 

Vh 

m 


•I* 


to 
<o 
«1 
8 


8 

C3 


CO 


to 
8 


8 

t3 


to 


CHAPTER  VI. 

VARICELLA.    CHICKEN  POX. 

French  :  La  Varicelle.  German  :  Wasserpochen. 

/^HICKEN  POX  is  a  specific  infectious  disease, 


^  of  which  the  characteristic  symptom  is  an 
eruption  of  vesicles,  usually  appearing  in  successive 
crops. 

For  a  long  time  it  was  confounded  with  smallpox, 
but  since  the  two  diseases  were  differentiated  in  the 
latter  part  of  the  eighteenth  century,  no  one  of  any 
authority  has  affirmed  their  identity.  An  attack 
of  smallpox  confers  no  immunity  against  a  subsequent 
attack  of  chicken  pox,  and  vice  versa ;  and  vaccination 
has  no  influence  in  protecting  from  chicken  pox. 
Moreover  smallpox  is  readily  inoculable  in  unpro- 
tected persons,  but  attempts  to  do  this  with  the 
material  from  the  vesicles  of  chicken  pox  have 
generally,  if  not  always  failed. 

The  disease  occasionally  prevails  in  epidemic 
form,  the  highest  seasonal  prevalence  being  in  the 
winter  months.  Children  are  more  frequently 
attacked,  but  adults  and  even  old  people  are  not 
exempt.  Statistics  show  that  of  the  entrants  at  the 
preparatory  schools,  32  per  cent  have  already  had 
the  disease,  and  32  per  cent  get  it  before  leaving ; 
at  the  public  schools,  7  per  cent  are  attacked,  and 
29  per  cent  leave  school  unattacked. 

The  infection  of  chicken  pox  is  due  to  direct 
personal  intercourse  ;   but  it  is  possible  that  the 


PLATE  III. 


Fig.  8. — Chicken  pox.  Often  the  marks  are  closer  together,  as 
in  smallpox,  with  which  the  eruption  may  be  confused,  as  well  as 
with  measles. 


Face  pti^c 


VARICELLA.      CHICKEN    POX  69 


poison  may  be  retained  in  and  conveyed  by  fomites. 
The  specific  organism  has  not  yet  been  isolated. 

Incubation.— A  wide  margin  of  from  twelve  to 
twenty  days  is  given  by  most  authorities,  but  in  the 
great  majority  of  cases  fourteen  days  elapse  between 
exposure  to  infection  and  the  first  appearance  of 
the  rash. 

Prodromal  Symptoms. — ^These  are  not  well  marked 
and  may  be  entirely  absent.  Usually,  in  young 
children  especially,  there  is  some  headache,  lassitude, 
and  peevishness ;  the  temperature  is  occasionally 
raised.  A  prodromal  rash,  sometimes  morbilliform 
and  sometimes  erythematous,  and  sometimes  one 
followed  by  the  other,  is  occasionally  seen  upon  the 
chest  and  abdomen. 

The  Eruption  makes  it  appearance,  usually,  on 
the  first  day  and  rarely  later  than  the  second  day  ; 
and  is,  often,  the  first  thing  to  attract  attention. 
There  is  no  definite  rule  as  to  the  part  of  the  body 
which  is  first  affected ;  more  generally,  perhaps, 
the  chest  and  back,  but,  also,  in  many  cases  the  face 
and  scalp,  in  which  case  the  glands  at  the  back  of 
the  ear  are  swollen  and  tender.  The  eruption,  at 
first,  consists  of  a  number  of  smaU  rose-coloured 
spots,  which  fade  on  pressure.  They  are  circular 
or  oblong  in  shape  and  slightly  raised  above  the  skin. 
Very  quickly,  usually  in  an  hour  or  two,  the  spots 
are  converted  into  vesicles,  containing  clear  watery 
fluid.'  In  from  twelve  to  twenty-four  hours  each 
vesicle  begins  to  dry  up  and  a  scab  forms  which  in 
five  or  six  days  falls  off  and  leaves  a  reddened,  flat, 
or  slightly  indented  surface.  Occasionally  the 
papular  stage  is  wanting,  and  the  vesicles  then  look 
hke  small  drops  of  water  on  the  skin.  The  eruption 
comes  out  in  crops,  most  often  on  three  successive 


60      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES   IN  SCHOOLS 


days.  After  the  appearance  of  the  successive  crops, 
the  eruption  can  be  seen  in  its  different  stages  of 
papules,  vesicles  and  scabs  on  the  body  at  the  same 
time.  Some  of  the  papules,  especially  those  of  the 
last  crop,  do  not  become  vesicles.  It  is  not  uncommon 
for  some  of  the  vesicles  to  become  purulent.  Spots 
often  appear  on  the  mucous  surfaces  of  the  mouth 
and  inside  the  eyelids. 
The  distribution  of  the  rash  is  characteristic  of  the 


DAYOr 
DISEASE 

/ 

2 

3 

4 

s 

e 

7 

TIME 

M  E 

M  E 

M  E 

M  E 

M  E 

M  E 

M  E 

105- 

•  - 
«- 
4- 

4' 

103- 

6- 

4' 

i 

Mil 

101.- 

6 

4' 

nil 

nil 

m- 

a 
e 

4' 
2 

0'.»- 
a 

t 

BS- 

4 
ft 

4 
t 

97- 

■^'Ir.  g.— Temperature  Chart  in  Chicken  Pox. 

disease  ;  appearing  most  abundantly  on  the  trunk 
and  scalp,  less  so  on  the  face  and  limbs,  and  sparsely 
on  the  hands  and  feet.  The  palms  and  soles  generally 
escape. 

Symptoms.— In  most  cases  chicken  pox  runs 
a  mild  course,  without  any  marked  symptoms. 
Sometimes  there  is  considerable  skin  irritation, 
especially  if  the  vesicles  are  abundant.  There  may 
be  only  sHght  elevation  of  the  temperature,  but 


VARICELLA.      CHICKEN    POX  61 


frequently  there  is  an  evening  rise  with  morning 
remission  on  three  or  four  successive  days,  coinciding 
with  each  fresh  outcrop  of  spots  {Fig.  9), 

Convalescence  is  usually  reached  in  the  course  of  a 
fortnight,  by  which  time  all  the  scabs  have  fallen  off. 
When  the  vesicles  become  pustular,  a  suppurative 
condition  of  the  skin  may  follow,  which  will  require 
special  attention  (see  Impetigo). 

Treatment. — Little  treatment  is  required.  Cases 
should  be  kept  in  bed  for  a  week,  and  a  further  period 
of  a  week  allowed  for  convalescence.  The  skin 
irritation  will  be  relieved  by  the  application  of  a 
lotion  containing  calamine  and  oxide  of  zinc ;  or  a 
dusting  powder,  consisting  of  oxide  of  zinc  and 
starch  in  equal  parts,  may  be  used. 

Duration  of  Infectiveness. —  Fourteen  days  from 
the  appearance  of  the  rash. 

H.  G.  A. 


62 


CHAPTER  VII . 

MUMPS. 

(Specific  or  Epidemic  Parotitis.) 
French:  Oreillons.      German:  Ziegenpeter. 

IVTUMPS  is  an  acute  infectious  disease  usually 
characterized  by  swelling  and  inflammation 
of  the  parotid  glands,  which  are  salivary  glands 
situated  in  the  cheek  just  in  front  of  the  ears.  Most 
of  the  cases  are  mild,  but  severe  symptoms  occasion- 
ally occur.  These,  however  alarming  they  may 
appear,  nearly  always  end  in  recovery. 

It  is  a  disease  of  children  and  young  adults,  the 
majority  of  cases  occurring  between  5  and  15  years, 
but  young  men  over  20  are  not  very  infrequently 
attacked.  Some  think  that  epidemics  occur  more 
commonly  in  cold,  wet  and  windy  weather. 

Although  the  disease  has  been  recognized  smce 
the  time  of  Hippocrates,  its  cause  has  not  even  now 
been  determined  with  certainty,  though  it  is  most 
likely  a  bacterium.* 

Incubation  Period. — Very  short  incubation  periods, 
such  as  three,  four,  or  five  days  and  very  long  ones, 
such  as  thirty-five  days  or  even  six  weeks,  are  men- 
tioned in  the  literature  on  the  subject.  If  these  really 
occur  they  must  be  very  exceptional  and  can  be  dis- 
regarded in  practice.  Fourteen  to  twenty-six  days 
may  be  taken  as  the  usual  limits;  in  the  majority 


*  The  Diplococcus  of  Laveran. 


MUMPS 


63 


of  cases  the  first  symptoms  appear  between  seventeen 
and  twenty-one  days  after  exposure  to  infection. 

Quarantine. — Usually  twenty-four  days  is  con- 
sidered sufficient. 

Infectivity. — ^The  secretions  of  the  mouth  are  no 
doubt  infectious,  and  the  disease  is  usually  trans- 
mitted directly  from  patient  to  patient.  Those 
sleeping  in  adjoining  beds  or  sitting  next  to  one 
another  at  work  are  very  likely  to  transmit  and 
receive  the  disease.  It  is  only  carried  a  very  short 
distance  by  third  persons,  and  does  not  readily 
spread  from  one  house  to  another.  The  patients 
are  probably  infectious  for  a  few  days  before  recogniz- 
able symptoms  of  the  disease  begin,  and  remain 
infectious  for  at  least  a  week  after  all  symptoms  have 
subsided.  Cases  are  recorded  in  which  they  have 
apparently  remained  infectious  for  much  longer 
(three  or  four  weeks),  but  this  is  exceptional,  and  as 
a  rule  no  harm  will  be  done  if  patients  are  allowed 
to  return  to  ordinary  life  a  clear  week  after  they 
have  apparently  recovered. 

Clinical  Course. — ^The  incubation  period  may  be 
free  from  any  symptoms  which  attract  attention, 
but  in  some  cases  there  may  be,  for  a  day  or  two, 
ill-defined  feelings  of  indisposition,  or  even  more 
definite  prodromal  or  preliminary  symptoms,  such 
as  nose-bleeding,  earache,  sore  throat  or  fever. 

An  interesting  and  httle  known  symptom  was 
described  by  Mirchamp  in  1903  as  occurring  in 
mumps  even  before  the  sweUing  and  pain  in  the 
parotid.  If  the  patient's  tongue  is  touched  with 
a  drop  of  vinegar  or  some  similar  substance  of  sharp 
flavour,  a  marked  secretion  of  saliva  from  the  parotid 
takes  place  which  is  accompanied  by  a  spasm  of  pain. 
The  sign  might  be  of  value  in  testing  those  who  had 


64      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


been  exposed  to  infection,  towards  the  end  of  the 
probable  incubation  period. 

The  onset,  in  the  great  majority  of  cases,  however, 
is  marked  by  a  sweUing  behind  the  jaw,  just  in  front 
of  the  ear,  accompanied  by  a  rise  of  temperature, 
and  more  or  less  feeling  of  illness.  The  swelling 
rapidly  increases,  and  in  two  or  three  days  may 
become  very  considerable,  extending  down  the  neck 
and  forwards  on  to  the  cheek.  All  movement  of 
the  jaws  becomes  very  painful,  and  it  is  difficult  for 
the  patient  to  open  his  mouth,  to  swallow,  or  even 
speak.  The  corresponding  gland  on  the  other  side 
usually  begins  to  sweU  a  day  or  two  after  the  first. 
Nose-bleeding  and  earache  are  not  uncommon.  In 
a  few  days  the  swelling  begins  to  subside,  and  the 
whole  attack  may  be  over  in  a  week  or  ten  days, 
leaving  no  permanent  damage.  As  a  rule,  adults 
who  contract  mumps  have  a  more  severe  attack  than 
children.  Although  mumps  is  nearly  always  a  mild 
disease,  and  it  appears  to  be  very  doubtful  if  any  one 
ever  died  of  it,  it  should  always  be  carefully  nursed 
and  treated  because  certain  compHcations  may 
occur  which  are  distressing  in  themselves  and 
occasionally  leave  serious  results  behind  them. 
These  compHcations  are  much  more  frequent  in  some 
epidemics  than  in  others,  so  that  a  comparatively 
limited  experience  of  mild  cases  should  not  put  us 
off  our  guard.  A  simple,  uncompHcated  attack 
may  give  rise  to  severe  fever,  or  t*b  actual  delirium, 
and  symptoms  which  closely  resemble  those  of 
meningitis.  The  chief  compHcation  is  pain,  inflam- 
mation, and  swelling  of  the  testicle  (known  as 
orchitis)  which  occurs  more  commonly  in  older  boys 
and  adults.  It  always  subsides,  but  in  some  cases 
the  organ  subsequently  atrophies.   This  complication 


MUMPS 


65 


usually  begins  when  the  swelling  in  the  cheek  is 
subsiding,  but  it  may  come  on  quite  early  or  even 
occur  as  a  first  symptom.  Owing  to  the  possibility 
of  this  complication  (which  cannot  be  foreseen  in 
any  particular  case)  older  boys  with  mumps  have 
to  be  kept  in  bed  for  ten  days.  Another  compli- 
cation is  inflammation  of  the  pancreas,  a  gland 
concerned  in  digestion  which  lies  in  the  upper 
part  of  the  abdomen.  This  gives  rise  to  pain  and 
often  serious  symptoms  of  illness,  such  as  vomiting 
of  blood,  passage  of  blood  with  the  stools,  and  con- 
siderable collapse.  It  appears  however  always  to  end 
in  recovery.  In  girls,  inflammation  of  the  breasts  is 
said  to  occur  occasionally.  Symptoms  which  have 
been  attributed  to  inflammation  of  the  ovaries  are 
also  said  to  have  been  observed,  but  this  is  very  rare. 
The  most  serious  complication  is  probably  deafness, 
which,  when  it  occurs,  is  sometimes  permanent. 

All  these  occasional  complications  point  to  the 
fact  that  mumps  is  a  general,  not  a  local  disease,  and 
is  due  to  some  germ  which  circulates  in  the  body 
and  though  usually  making  its  effects  seen  in  the 
parotid  gland,  at  times  lodges  in  other  organs  also. 
In  fact  cases  have  been  described  in  which  the 
parotid  gland  escaped  while  one  of  the  other  struc- 
tures mentioned  became  inflamed. 

The  submaxillary  gland  (another  salivary  gland 
lying  under  the  side  of  the  jaw)  is  also  sometimes 
involved,  either  alone  or  with  the  parotid.  When 
an  epidemic  of  mumps  is  in  progress  these  cases  give 
rise  to  no  especial  difficulty,  but  when,  as  sometimes 
happens,  a  single  case  of  inflammation  of  the 
submaxillary  gland  occurs,  its  true  nature  may  not 
be  recognized,  until,  perhaps,  the  infection  has  been 
transmitted  to  another  person  who  develops  the 
disease  in  its  usual  situation.  J.  M.  F.-B. 


66 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

WHOOPING    COUGH.  PERTUSSIS. 

French  :  Coqueluche.    German  :  Keuchhusten. 

"V^HOOPING  cough  is  a  specific  infectious  disease, 
'  '  characterized  by  catarrh  of  the  respiratory- 
passages,  and  by  a  pecuHar  spasmodic  cough.  It  is 
specially  common  in  children  under  five,  but  may 
occur  at  any  age,  cases  having  been  recorded  at 
eighty  years.  Although  no  case  of  whooping  cough 
is  to  be  treated  lightly,  it  is  hardly  ever  fatal  in 
children  over  ten  ;  997  per  cent  of  the  deaths  in 
England  and  Wales  from  this  disease  in  1908 
occurred  in  children  below  this  age.  It  is  said  to 
occur  more  frequently  in  the  wet,  cold  weather  ;  and 
though  cases  are  always  present  in  large  towns, 
epidemics  usually  take  place  only  every  three  or  four 
years. 

Whooping  cough  is  generally  believed  to  be  due 
to  a  germ  which,  hke  that  of  diphtheria,  is  lodged  in 
the  respiratory  passages,  and  thence  diffuses  its 
poisons  or  toxins  into  the  blood.* 

Incubation. — ^The  period  is  not  easy  to  determine, 
but  seems  to  he  between  four  and  fourteen  days  or 
longer. 

Quarantine  is  fixed  at  twenty-one  days  to  allow 

*  A  germ  described  by  Bordet  and  Gengou  in  1906  is  the 
best  accredited  among  several  which  have  been  described 
as  the  causal  agents. 


WHOOPING    COUGH.     PERTUSSIS  67 


for  cases  in  which  slight  catarrhal  symptoms  may 
be  overlooked  owing  to  the  whoop  not  appearing 
for  a  week  or  so. 

InfecUvUy. — ^There  appears  to  be  no  doubt  that 
the  most  infectious  stage  of  whooping  cough  is  that 
before  the  whoop  develops,  and  that  from  the 
appearance  of  this  symptom  the  infectiousness  of 
the  patient  begins  to  dechne.  After  six  weeks,  in 
most  cases  at  any  rate,  the  patient  has  ceased  to  be 
infectious  ;  certainly  he  is  so  if  the  whoop  has  been 
absent  a  fortnight.  In  very  brief,  slight  cases  the 
infectivity  is  no  doubt  still  shorter,  and  in  severe 
cases  it  may  be  longer,  but  the  occurrence  of  an 
occasional  whoop,  or  even  of  several  such,  months 
after  the  disease  has  apparently  ceased  cannot  be 
held  to  denote  that  the  patient  is  necessarily  still 
infectious.  As  the  infection  is  in  the  catarrhal 
secretions  of  the  throat,  and  is  spread  by  coughing, 
fairly  close  contact  is  necessary  for  its  transference 
to  other  persons.  It  is  not  very  easily  carried  by 
third  persons,  as  the  germ  soon  dies  on  exposure  to 
light  and  air,  but  at  least  one  well  authenticated 
case  is  on  record  in  which  it  was  conveyed  by  clothes 
which  had  been  weU  sprinkled  with  germs  by  an 
infected  child,  and  retained  their  infectivity  for 
some  hours.  Thorough  washing  and  cleaning  is 
probably  all  that  is  necessary  for  the  disinfection 
of  rooms  in  which  whooping  cough  patients  have 
been  isolated. 

Clinical  Course. — ^The  period  of  invasion,  after  the 
usual  incubation,  is  characterized  by  what  appears 
to  be  a  feverish  cold  and  cough,  and  for  a  week 
there  may  be  nothing  absolutely  typical. 

In  suspected  cases,  however,  or  where  the  patient 
is  known  to  have  been  exposed  to  infection,  an 


68      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


examination  of  the  blood  may  help  to  clear  up  the 
diagnosis  before  the  typical  symptoms  have  developed. 
The  total  number  of  white  blood  cells  is  normally 
greater  in  young  children  than  in  adults,  but  it  is 
still  further  increased  in  whooping  cough,  and  the 
proportion  of  the  various  kinds  of  cells  is  also  altered. 
The  test,  however,  can  only  be  made  by  one  accus- 
tomed to  this  form  of  blood  examination,  and  the 
transmission  of  specimens  for  examination  at  a  distant 
laboratory,  though  methods  have  been  devised  for  its 
accomplishment,  is  not  a  satisfactory  proceeding.* 

The  cough  usually  becomes  less  frequent  and  more 
"  paroxysmal  "  in  character  towards  the  end  of  this 
period,  and  then  the  second  stage  is  ushered  in  by 
an  attack  of  vomiting  or  a  definite  whoop.  This 
second  stage  is  the  one  in  which  the  disease  is  most 
frequently  first  recognized  :  though,  as  the  patient 
often  begins  to  whoop  at  night,  it  is  the  nurse  and 
not  the  doctor  who  is  usually  able  to  make  the 
diagnosis.  A  typical  attack  of  coughing  consists 
of  a  number  of  rapid  expiratory  efforts,  such  as  are 
made  by  any  unfortunate  person  who  has  swallowed 
a  dry  breadcrumb  "  the  wrong  way."  The  face  in 
a  severe  paroxysm  becomes  swollen,  puffy  and 
congested,  and  especially  in  younger  children,  the 
choking  nature  of  the  seizure  is  very  painful  to 
witness.  Then  suddenly  the  cough  comes  to  an  end 
and  the  patient  succeeds  in  drawing  air  into  his 
lungs  again  with  a  loud,  crowing  noise  ;  this  is  the 


*  Bordet  and  Gengou  have  also  described  a  method  of 
diagnosis  which  is  dependent  on  finding  the  bacillus  in  the 
expectoration.  This  may  be  done  early  in  the  disease,  when 
it  is  most  abundant.  The  method  is  somewhat  costly  and 
elaborate,  and  is  therefore  quite  unsuited  for  routine  practice. 
In  special  cases  it  might  be  advisable  to  adopt  it 


WHOOPING    COUGH.     PERTUSSIS  69 


"whoop."  Sometimes  several  of  these  paroxysms 
follow  one  another  immediately;  often  the  attack 
ends  in  vomiting.  Sometimes  a  little  blood-stained 
mucus  is  ejected  at  the  end  of  the  cough,  and  at 
times  there  may  be  considerable  haemorrhage  from 
the  nose  or  elsewhere.  These  bleedings  however 
are  not  as  a  rule  at  all  dangerous.  In  some  cases 
the  attacks  may  occur  as  often  as  once  an  hour,  and 
the  child  if  young  may  become  seriously  exhausted. 
Usually,  however,  they  are  not  nearly  so  frequent 
even  at  the  height  of  the  attack,  and  older  children 
are  generally  fairly  well  between  the  fits.  The  stage 
of  defervescence  is  marked  by  a  diminution  in 
number  and  violence  of  the  fits,  until  they  gradually 
cease  altogether. 

During  the  first  or  catarrhal  stage,  patients  are 
best  in  bed,  during  the  second  or  "  whooping  "  stage 
they  are  usually  best  up  and  about,  and  in  good 
weather  can  go  out-of-doors.  The  danger  of  whoop- 
ing cough  is  that  it  is  liable,  like  measles,  to  be 
followed  by  broncho-pneumonia.  Among  young 
children  and  among  those  who  are  badly  fed  and 
nursed,  this  is  a  very  fatal  complication.  It  usually 
appears  in  the  third  or  fourth  week  after  the  onset 
of  the  symptoms.  In  infants,  convulsions  may 
complicate  an  attack  and  may  prove  fatal.  In 
patients  of  any  age  the  violence  of  the  cough  may 
more  or  less  strain  the  heart.  The  protection  against 
a  second  attack  afforded  by  whooping  cough  is  very 
complete.  The  majority  of  cases  in  which  a  second 
attack  appears  to  occur  are  no  doubt  instances  of 
mistaken  diagnosis.  This  is  rendered  probable  by 
the  difficulty  of  making  a  positive  diagnosis  which 
even  experienced  doctors  may  feel  in  some  cases. 

J.  M.  F.-B. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


GLANDULAR  FEVER. 

(Febrile  Polyadenitis). 
French :  Fievre  Ganglionare. 
German  :  Drusenfieber. 

HIS  condition  was  first  described  as  an  acute 


specific  disease  in  1889  by  Pfeiffer,  the 
discoverer  of  the  influenza  bacillus.  It  usually 
occurs  in  children  between  four  and  twelve  years  of 
age,  and  is  not  common  in  younger  or  older  persons. 
It  is  almost  certainly  due  to  a  germ,  which  probably 
enters  through  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  throat 
or  nose ;  it  does  not,  however,  appear  certain 
that  the  same  germ  is  responsible  for  all  epidemics. 
The  patient  is  presumably  infectious  during  the 
continuance  of  the  symptoms. 

Incubation  Period. — ^This  appears  to  vary.  In  one 
case  it  was  as  short  as  twenty-four  hours.  In  other 
epidemics  the  limits  have  been  seven  to  nine  days, 
and  four  to  seven  days. 

Clinical  Course. — The  onset  is  fairly  sudden,  with 
fever  and  pain  in  the  neck  ;  sometimes  there  is  sore 
throat,  swallowing  may  be  difficult,  and  vomiting 
or  shivering  sometimes  marks  the  beginning  of  the 
disease.  In  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours  the 
glands  in  the  neck  become  swollen,  painful,  hard, 
and  tender  to  touch.  They  may  continue  in  this  con- 
dition for  some  days.    Sometimes  there  is  pain  and 


GLANDULAR  FEVER 


71 


tenderness  in  the  abdomen,  and  glands  in  other 
parts  of  the  body  may  be  affected.  They  never 
form  abscesses.  When  the  glands  subside  (which 
is  usually  in  two  or  three  weeks)  the  fever  abates, 
and  recovery  is  usually  absolute,  though  convales- 
cence may  be  prolonged.  There  is  often  constipation 
during  the  attack,  less  frequently  diarrhoea  occurs. 

Complications  are  rarely  observed,  and  usually 
also  end  in  recovery.  The  most  serious  is  inflam- 
mation of  the  kidney.  Bleeding  from  the  nose  and 
from  the  bladder  may  occur. 

Mortality. — In  96  cases  i  died. 

J.  M.  F.-B. 


72 


CHAPTER  X. 

DIPHTHERIA. 

French  :  Diphterie.     German  :  Diphtherie. 


^  characterized  by  the  formation  of  a  mem- 
branous exudation  in  the  throat,  nose,  and  upper 
air  passages,  and  later  by  the  occurrence  of  paralysis 
in  various  parts  of  the  body,  in  a  certain  proportion 
of  cases. 

History. — ^The  disease  appears  to  have  been 
recognized  in  very  early  times.  It  was  probably 
known  to  Hippocrates  and  Galen  and  is  described 
by  Aretasus  (iii  a.d.).  It  was  not,  however,  till 
the  eighteenth  century  that  its  clinical  features  were 
accurately  distinguished,  and  the  name  is  compara- 
tively recent,  having  been  coined  by  Bretonneau  in 
1821. 

Considerable  difficulty  was  experienced,  however, 
in  separating  cases  of  diphtheria  from  other  severe 
kinds  of  sore  throat,  until  in  1883  Klebs  demon- 
strated the  causal  organism,  which  was  first  success- 
fully cultivated  on  an  artificial  medium  by  Loeffier 
in  the  following  year.* 

The  bacillus  can  easily  be  cultivated  on  special 
media  in  from  eighteen  to  twenty-four  hours  and 
then  presents,  when  stained  by  appropriate  methods, 


specific  infectious  disease 


*  This  organism  is  now  known  as  the  Diphtheria  or  Klebs^ 
Loeffler  bacillus. 


DIPHTHERIA 


73 


a  characteristic  appearance  under  the  microscope. 
At  present,  therefore,  there  are  two  methods  by 
which  diphtheria  can  be  recognized,  and  in  all  cases 
it  is  important  that  both  should  be  employed,  for 
reasons  which  will  appear  shortly.  The  first  is 
the  "  cHnical  "  method,  and  until  the  bacillus  had 
been  discovered,  this  was  the  only  one  available. 
Physicians  by  observing  the  symptoms  can,  with 
considerable  accuracy,  determine  whether  a  given 
case  is  one  of  diphtheria  or  not.  The  second  method 
is  the  "  bacteriological."  A  small  cotton  -  wool 
swab  is  rubbed  over  the  throat  of  the  suspected 
person,  and  sent  in  a  closed  tube  to  a  bacteriologist. 
The  latter,  by  transferring  the  material  absorbed 
by  the  cotton-wool  swab  on  to  a  suitable  culture 
medium,  obtains  in  some  twenty  hours,  a  "culture" 
or  "  growth "  of  the  organisms  from  the  throat, 
which  he  examines.  In  a  large  percentage  of  cases 
he  is  able  to  report  definitely  the  presence  or  absence 
of  the  characteristic  bacillus. 

These  two  methods  of  diagnosis  should  always 
be  employed  together,  for  the  following  reasons. 
In  typical  cases  an  experienced  physician  can  gener- 
ally diagnose  diphtheria  with  certainty,  but  in  a 
certain  number,  the  signs  he  expects  to  observe  are 
misleading  or  absent,  and  here  the  bacteriologist  is  of 
great  assistance.  It  is  now  known  that  other  bacteria 
can  produce  a  condition  in  the  throat  closely  resem- 
bling diphtheria.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  not  safe 
to  rely  solely  on  the  bacteriological  examination, 
for  several  fallacies  may  occur.  In  the  first  place 
the  swab  may  fail  to  "  catch  "  any  of  the  bacilli, 
especially  if  only  a  few  are  present  or  if  there  is  any 
difficulty  in  applying  it  to  the  part  of  the  throat 
affected.    In  the  second  place,  even  though  the 


74      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


baciUi  are  taken  up  on  the  swab  they  may  not  grow 
properly  when  cultivated.  This,  in  many  cases, 
is  due  to  some  antiseptic  having  been  applied  to  the 
throat  a  short  time  before  the  swab  was  taken.  In 
other  cases  the  reason  may  be  obscure.  In  the  third 
place,  cases  of  undoubted  diphtheria  have  been 
known  to  occur  in  which  the  bacilli  have  not  been 
found  until  quite  late  in  the  case,  while  in  what  is 
known  as  "  laryngeal "  diphtheria  they  may  be 
situated  only  in  the  larynx  too  far  down  for  any 
ordinary  swab  to  reach  them. 

At  present  it  may  therefore  be  definitely  laid  down, 
that  though  swabs  should  be  taken  in  all  suspected 
cases,  the  appropriate  treatment  should  always  be 
adopted  where  the  cHnical  evidence  points  to  diph- 
theria, even  though  the  results  of  the  bacteriological 
examination  are  negative.  On  the  other  hand,  if 
the  baciUi  are  shown  to  be  present,  the  treatment 
should  be  adopted,  even  if  the  case  is  not  typical 
from  the  clinical  point  of  view.  The  treatment  of 
"  carriers  "  will  be  discussed  later  on. 

As  regards  the  life  of  the  diphtheria  bacillus 
outside  the  body,  comparatively  little  is  known. 
It  is  thought  by  some  to  have  its  habitat  in  the  soil, 
and  importance  has  been  attached  in  this  connection 
to  the  opening  up  of  old  drains  or  foundations  as 
setting  free  the  bacilli  and  starting  epidemics. 
However  this  may  be,  it  appears  certain  that  the 
spread  of  the  disease  is  almost  entirely  a  matter  of 
personal  contact,  and  that  the  segregation  and  treat- 
ment of  persons  harbouring  the  bacillus  is  at  present 
the  most  successful  method  of  arresting  the  course 
of  an  epidemic. 

Mode  of  Infection. — ^The  diphtheria  bacillus  lodges 
on  the  mucous  membrane  (usually  on  some  part  of 


DIPHTHERIA 


75 


the  upper  respiratory  passages)  and  there  proceeds 
to  grow.  A  slight  abrasion,  microscopic  possibly 
in  size,  which  may  easily  be  produced  by  accidental 
causes,  allows  of  the  poison  produced  by  the  organism 
becoming  absorbed  into  the  body,  while  the  local 
damage  to  the  mucous  membrane  favours  the  growth 
of  the  bacillus  and  leads  to  the  formation  of  the 
so-caUed  membrane.  The  bacillus  itself  does  not  pass 
into  the  body  fluids,  at  any  rate  not  to  an  appreciable 
extent,  but  remains  growing  on  the  mucous  membrane 
and  manufacturing  the  toxins  or  poisons  which  give 
rise  to  most  of  the  symptoms  of  the  disease.* 

Incidence. — Diphtheria  is  for  the  most  part  a 
disease  of  childhood,  though  adults  are  not  exempt. 
It  is  not  very  frequently  seen  in  infants,  but  between 
the  second  and  twelfth  years  the  large  majority  of 
the  cases  occur.  An  attack  confers  only  a  very 
short  period  of  immunity. 

Clinical  Course. — ^The  incubation  period  is  short, 
and  may  be  only  twenty -four  hours.  Usually  it  is 
two  or  three  days,  but   may  be   a  week.  The 


*  The  foregoing  account  is  necessarily  much  simplified, 
as  the  bacteriology  of  diphtheria  is  in  reaUty  a  very  large 
subject  in  itself,  and  many  of  the  problems  connected  with 
it  have  not  yet  been  satisfactorily  solved  in  spite  of  the 
enormous  amount  of  work  which  has  been  lavished  upon  them. 
It  may  be  as  well,  however,  to  mention  that,  besides  the 
diphtheria  bacillus  proper,  organisms  closely  resembling  it 
are  known  and  found  in  healthy  and  diseased  throats.  Of 
these  one,  called  Hofmann's  bacillus,  occupies  a  peculiar 
and  very  dubious  position,  and  its  presence  in  the  respiratory 
passages  has  been  variously  interpreted.  At  least  this  can 
be  said  concerning  it,  that  during  an  epidemic  its  presence 
should  be  regarded  as  a  suspicious  circumstance,  sufficient 
to  justify  further  investigation  and  a  certain  amount  of  local 
treatment ;  isolation  of  the  persons  harbouring  it  need  not 
however  be  insisted  upon  at  the  present  stage  of  our  know- 
ledge. 


76       INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


quarantine  period  of  ten  days  is  certainly  a  full 
allowance.  The  infectiviiy  of  the  patient  is  now 
determined  by  the  presence  or  absence  of  the 
diphtheria  bacillus  and  by  this  alone.  When 
three  negative  results  have  been  obtained  at  a  few 
days'  interval,  the  patient  being  otherwise  free  from 
all  symptoms  and  apparently  well,  he  may  be  re- 
garded as  non-infectious. 

The  first  symptom  of  an  attack  of  diphtheria  is 
usually  fever,  that  is  a  rise  of  temperature  which  is 
moderate  in  most  cases,  accompanied  by  headache, 
vague  pains,  malaise  and  sometimes  vomiting. 
The  subsequent  symptoms  will  depend  upon  the 
situation  of  the  lesion,  which  may  be  in  the  tonsils 
and  palate  (faucial),  in  the  larynx  (laryngeal),  or 
in  the  nose  (nasal).  Other  parts  of  the  body  are 
occasionally  affected,  but  these  are  the  usual 
situations.  In  the  faucial  cases,  which  comprise 
the  majority,  the  symptoms  are  those  of  a  sore 
throat,  together  with  enlargement  of  the  glands  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  throat  and,  what  is  very  important, 
a  much  greater  depression  of  the  general  health 
than  either  the  temperature  or  the  amount  of  soreness 
experienced  in  the  throat  would  seem  to  warrant. 

The  patient  is  languid,  sometimes  drowsy, 
apathetic,  and  ill ;  although  there  may  not  be  much 
difficulty  in  swallowing,  and  the  temperature,  never 
very  high,  may  fall  in  a  few  days.  Meanwhile  the 
throat,  if  examined,  shows  a  more  or  less  charac- 
teristic condition,  being  covered  by  large  or  small 
patches  of  greyish  white  ghstening  "  membrane " 
or  exudation  which  varies  in  amount,  consistency, 
and  distribution,  but  is  often  distinguished  by  the 
facts  that  it  is  not  limited  to  the  tonsils  and  that  if 
removed  it  leaves  a  raw  inflamed  surface  beneath. 


DIPHTHERIA 


77 


In  the  laryngeal  cases,  the  earhest  characteristic 
symptom  is  the  hard  brassy  cough  which  denotes  the 
presence  of  some  obstructing  substance  in  the  larynx, 
and  which  is  commonly  described  as  Croup.  This 
croupy  cough  may  doubtless  occur  in  many  other 
conditions  besides  laryngeal  diphtheria,  but  it  is 
also  certain  that,  before  the  advent  of  modem 
methods  of  diagnosis,  many  cases  diagnosed  as  croup 
were  in  reality  due  to  the  diphtheria  bacillus.  Then, 
sooner  or  later,  symptoms  of  serious  obstruction  to 
respiration  arise  due  to  the  presence  of  membrane 
in  the  larynx.  Attacks  of  dyspnoea  or  difficulty  in 
breathing  occur,  and  the  patient  becomes  blue  in  the 
face,  gasps  for  breath,  and — in  young  children  especi- 
ally— the  spaces  between  the  lower  ribs  become 
sucked  in  with  each  attempt  at  inspiration.  These 
attacks  become  more  frequent  until  the  child  is  in 
a  condition  of  permanent  suffocation  which,  unless 
prompt  measures  are  taken,  is  almost  certain  to 
prove  fatal. 

The  nasal  type  of  diphtheria  is  characterized  in 
most  cases  by  a  persistent  nasal  discharge,  and 
sometimes  by  the  presence  of  actual  membrane  in 
the  nasal  passages.  Constitutional  symptoms  are 
often  but  sHght,  although  the  patient  is  extremely 
infectious,  and  is  very  difficult  to  cure  even  under 
careful  treatment. 

It  must  be  understood  that  any  one  of  these  types 
may  pass  into  any  other  type  by  extension  and 
growth  of  the  membrane,  especially  in  untreated  cases. 

The  subsequent  course  of  the  case  wiU  depend  on 
the  severity  of  the  attack,  the  situation  of  the 
membrane,  and  the  period  at  which  the  patient 
first  receives  treatment  by  antitoxin.  A  consider- 
able degree  of  general  weakness  is  usually  seen  both 


78      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

during  and  after  an  attack,  and  besides  this,  the 
toxins  or  poisons  are  specially  prone  to  attack  the 
heart  and  certain  parts  of  the  nervous  system, 
causing  cardiac  failure  and  diverse  forms  of  paralysis. 

Heart  failure  may  occur  early  in  a  case  of 
diphtheria,  that  is  within  the  first  week  or  fortnight, 
and  is  a  most  serious  complication,  frequently  ending 
fatally.  Sometimes  death  occurs  quite  suddenly 
and  almost  unexpectedly.  But  the  possibility  of 
heart  failure  does  not  cease  after  the  acute  stage  of 
the  disease  has  passed  off,  and  convalescents  may 
suddenly  coUapse,  especially  if  due  care  has  not  been 
taken  to  save  them  from  exertion  or  physical  strain 
of  all  kinds.  A  child  apparently  nearly  weU  may 
sit  up  in  bed  and  fall  back  dead,  or,  in  less  severe 
instances,  faint  away  owing  to  some  shght  extra 
exertion. 

The  various  forms  of  paralysis  usually  appear  after 
the  second  week,  but  may  occur  earlier.  They  are 
mostly  seen  in  the  more  severe  cases.  The  common- 
est form  of  paralysis  is  that  affecting  the  soft  palate 
which  leads  to  the  regurgitation  of  fluids  through 
the  nose  when  an  attempt  is  made  to  swallow  them, 
and  imparts  a  peculiar  twang  to  the  voice.  The 
muscles  moving  the  eyes  may  be  affected,  causing 
squint,  or  loss  of  power  to  accommodate  the  sight 
for  near  objects,  so  that  the  patient  becomes  unable 
to  read.  Paralysis  of  the  limbs  is  fairly  common, 
so  that  the  patient  cannot  stand  or  move  his  arms 
and  legs.  The  muscles  of  respiration  are  also  affected 
in  some  cases,  as  well  as  those  in  other  parts  of  the 
body. 

Unless  the  heart  is  affected,  the  outlook  in  these 
various  forms  of  paralysis  is  usually  hopeful,  and 
complete   recovery   ultimately   occurs,   but  their 


DIPHTHERIA 


79 


significance  is  really  important  as  indicating  a 
tendency  to  heart  failure  and  necessitating  the  most 
careful  treatment  and  watching. 

Treatment— It  is  practically  of  Httle  use  to  try 
and  destroy  the  baciUi  in  the  throat  by  means  of 
antiseptics,  though  mild  antiseptics  are  of  use  in 
most  cases.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  the  patient  is 
suffering  from  a  severe  form  of  poisoning  and  is 
hable  to  heart  failure,  rest  in  the  recumbent  position, 
a  nourishing  and  easily  digested  diet,  and  very  care- 
ful nursing  by  experienced  persons,  are  absolutely 
essential  in  all  cases. 

The  main  point  in  the  treatment  of  diphtheria 
is,  however,  the  early  administration  of  antitoxin 
(see  page  7).  The  details  of  this  process  must  be 
left  to  the  judgment  of  the  medical  adviser,  but  it 
wiJl  not  be  out  of  place  here  to  mention  some  of  the 
reasons  which  have  convinced  the  vast  majority  of 
medical  men  of  the  value  of  this  method. 

I.  The  mortality  from  diphtheria  has  fallen,  since 
the  use  of  antitoxin  became  general,  in  all  parts  of 
the  world  from  which  statistics  are  available. 
Considering  the  large  number  of  figures  whch  have 
been  collected  this  evidence  in  itself  is  of  considerable 
value  ;  but  it  must  be  allowed  that  it  is  not  absolutely 
conclusive,  because  there  is  reason  to  believe  that 
the  type  of  the  disease  is  somewhat  milder  than 
formerly,  and  because  many  very  mild  cases  can 
now  be  correctly  diagnosed  by  bacteriological  methods, 
which  in  earher  times  would  not  have  been  classed 
as  diphtheria  at  all.  As  an  example,  however,  the 
figures  of  the  MetropoHtan  Asylums  Board  may  be 
quoted.  The  average  mortahty  in  the  hospitals  of 
the  board  during  the  five  years  before  the  introduction 
of  antitoxin  was  about  33  per  cent,  whereas  in  the 


80      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


seven  years  following  its  introduction  it  fell  to  about 
i6  per  cent,  and  in  the  subsequent  years  to  9-5  per 
cent. 

2.  Better  evidence  can  be  obtained  from  the 
mortality  returns  of  the  laryngeal  diphtheria,  which 
is  always  a  severe  and  dangerous  form,  owing  to  the 
extreme  likelihood  of  asphyxia.  Before  antitoxin 
the  mortahty  in  these  cases  was  quoted  as  about 
66  per  cent,  and  after  antitoxin  the  mortahty  fell  to 
about  27  per  cent. 

3.  Probably  the  strongest  point  in  favour  of  the 
value  of  antitoxin  in  diphtheria  is  that  the  mortahty 
can  be  shewn  to  decrease  progressively  the  earlier 
the  remedy  is  administered.  Thus  at  the  Brook 
Hospital  (Metropolitan  Asylums  Board)  during 
eleven  years,  cases  treated  on  the  first  day  had 
a  mortahty  of  zero  ;  those  on  the  second  day  a 
mortahty  of  over  4  per  cent ;  those  on  the  third 
day  of  over  11  per  cent ;  those  on  the  fourth  diy  of 
over  16  per  cent ;  those  on  the  fifth  and  later  days 
of  over  18  per  cent.* 

There  are  two  points  with  regard  to  the  adminis- 
tration of  antitoxin  which  may  be  mentioned,  as  they 
are  sometimes  urged  as  reasons  against  its  use.  In 
the  first  place  it  has  been  said  that  since  antitoxin 
has  been  generally  employed  more  cases  of  diphtheritic 
paralysis  have  been  observed,  and  that  consequently 
the  antitoxin  must  predispose  persons  to  this.  There 
is,  however,  no  positive  evidence  as  to  this  being  a 
direct  instance  of  cause  and  effect.  Diphtheritic 
paralysis  is  more  likely  to  occur  in  cases  of  virulent 
infection,  and  as,  before  antitoxin  was  introduced, 


*  For  these  points  the  writer  is  indebted  to  Bosanquet 
and  Eyre's  Serums,  Vaccines,  and  Toxines,  2nd  edition,  1909. 


DIPHTHERIA 


81 


a  much  larger  proportion  of  such  cases  died  early  in 
the  course  of  the  disease,  it  manifestly  follows  that 
fewer  survived  to  manifest  the  compUcation. 

In  the  second  place,  in  a  small  proportion  of  cases, 
unpleasant  symptoms  such  as  fever,  pains  over  the 
body,  and  peculiar  irritable  rashes,  have  been 
observed.  These  symptoms  are  not  due  to  the 
antidiphtheritic  principles  in  the  injection,  but  to 
the  serum,  or  vehicle  in  which  they  exist,  and  may 
occur  if  the  blood  serum  of  any  animal  is  injected 
into  one  of  another  species.  The  condition  is  seldom 
more  than  annoying  to  the  patient,  and  soon  passes 
off.  It  should  not  be  allowed  to  weigh  against  the 
now  well  estabHshed  advantages  of  antitoxin  in  so 
serious  a  condition  as  diphtheria. 

In  cases  where  the  membrane  is  situated  in  the 
larynx,  the  obstruction  to  respiration  may  necessitate 
the  operation  of  tracheotomy,  in  which  an  opening 
is  made  in  the  wind-pipe  or  trachea,  below  the  point 
of  obstruction,  and  a  tube  is  inserted  through  which 
the  patient  breathes.  Great  relief  is  often  afforded 
and  many  lives  have  been  saved  by  this  proceeding, 
but  sometimes  the  patients  succumb  to  the  poisoning 
of  the  system  which,  of  course,  is  not  directly 
influenced.  The  early  use  of  antitoxin  has  certainly 
rendered  this  operation  less  frequently  necessary. 

In  place  of  tracheotomy,  the  procedure  known 
as  "  intubation  "  may  be  adopted.  By  means  of 
special  instruments  a  small  tube  is  inserted  through 
the  mouth  and  lodged  in  the  larynx  ;  through  this 
the  patient  is  enabled  to  get  sufficient  air,  in  spite  of 
the  presence  of  the  membrane.  The  choice  between 
these  two  methods  must  be  left  to  the  practitioner 
in  charge  of  the  case,  and  will  reasonably  depend 
partly  upon  the  experience  he  has  had  ;  every^man 

6 


82      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


will  be  more  likely  to  get  a  good  result  from  a  method 
with  which  he  is  familiar  than  from  one  of  which  he 
has  little  practical  experience.  In  general,  however, 
it  may  be  said  that  intubation,  although  it  avoids 
a  cutting  operation,  and  is  less  likely  to  be  followed 
by  bronchopneumonia,  requires  the  more  constant 
and  immediate  presence  of  the  doctor,  and  is  thus 
hardly  suitable  for  cases  where  it  may  be  some  time 
before  he  can  be  brought  in  case  of  emergency.  In 
hospitals  where  there  is  always  a  medical  officer  at 
hand,  intubation  is  undoubtedly  a  very  valuable 
proceeding,  and  presents  many  advantages  and  but 
few  disadvantages ;  in  the  country,  on  the  other 
hand,  tracheotomy  is  perhaps,  on  the  whole,  a  safer 
method,  as  a  trained  nurse  can  deal  with  any  emer- 
gency until  the  arrival  of  the  doctor. 

Prophylaxis. — ^As  has  been  said,  the  spread  of 
diphtheria  is  nearly  always  a  matter  of  personal 
contact,  so  that  whenever  a  case  occurs  in  a  school 
the  throats  of  all  those  in  contact  with  the  patient 
should  be  submitted  to  a  bacteriological  examination. 
In  private  schools  the  boys  and  all  members  of  the 
household  should  be  thus  examined ;  in  pubhc  schools 
it  is  generally  enough  if  the  boys  and  others  hving  in 
the  same  house  are  so  tested.  When  this  is  done,  it 
may  often  be  found  that  several  persons  not  show- 
ing any  sign  of  illness,  are  carrying  the  diphtheria 
bacillus  in  their  throats  or  noses.  These  persons 
are  called  "  carriers "  and  are  a  source  of  possible 
infection  in  others.  They  should  therefore  be 
isolated,  but  not  placed  with  actual  sufferers  from 
the  disease,  as  the  bacilli  they  carry  may  not  be 
virulent,  and  they  are  hable  therefore  to  acquire  a 
fresh  and  virulent  strain  of  bacillus  from  the  patients. 

Antitoxin  is  not  of  much  value  in  the  treatment 


DIPHTHERIA 


83 


of  "carriers,"  as  it  mainly  acts  by  neutralizing  the 
poisons  formed  by  the  bacillus.  In  "  carriers  "  there 
is  little  or  no  poisoning  going  on,  as  is  evidenced  by 
the  absence  of  the  symptoms  of  illness.  Antiseptics 
of  various  kinds  may  be  tried  ;  probably  the  most 
ef&cacious  is  some  preparation  of  peroxide  of  hydro- 
gen. But  in  spite  of  the  most  active  treatment,  the 
bacilli  still  remain  present  in  the  throat  for  long 
periods  in  some  cases.  Three  to  six  weeks  is  by  no 
means  an  unusual  time,  and  in  exceptional  cases 
the  bacilli  have  been  present  for  a  year.  When  a 
case  of  this  sort  occurs,  it  is  possible  to  test  the 
virulence  of  the  bacilli  by  means  of  an  animal 
experiment ;  and  this  should  always  be  done  when 
the  bacilli  are  found  for  more  than  a  month  in  an 
apparently  healthy  throat. 

Animals  may  be  a  source  of  infection  ;  it  is  not 
certain  that  pigeons  or  fowls  can  convey  diphtheria 
to  human  beings,  but  the  case  against  cats  is  fairly 
well  proved. 

Diphtheria  may  in  certain  cases  be  traced  to  an 
infected  milk  supply,  so  that  not  only  should  full 
enquiries  be  made  as  to  the  source  of  the  milk  and 
the  possibility  of  its  contamination,  but  a  sample 
should  be  sent  for  bacteriological  examination.  The 
detection  of  the  diphtheria  bacillus  in  milk  is,  how- 
ever, a  somewhat  complicated  process  and  is  beset 
with  certain  sources  of  error.  Great  care  must 
therefore  be  taken  in  selecting  a  thoroughly  com- 
petent and  well  known  bacteriologist  to  perform 
the  test.  It  is  also  advisable  to  have  the  drainage 
system  overhauled.  In  the  opinion  of  the  writer 
defective  drains  are  far  more  often  a  predisposing 
than  an  immediate  cause  of  an  outbreak  of  diphtheria, 
and  in  a  great  number  of  cases  no  sanitary  defect 


84      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


exists  in  houses  where  the  disease  occurs.  Still,  it  is 
never  advisable  to  omit  any  reasonable  precaution 
in  a  serious  condition  such  as  diphtheria,  and  an 
assurance  that  all  is  well  with  the  drainage  is  decidedly 
advantageous  from  the  pubhc  point  of  view.  Strict 
isolation  of  the  patient  and  of  all  "carriers"  is 
essential  in  diphtheria,  and  all  articles  used  by  them 
must  be  carefully  disinfected  after  use  (see  page  15). 

The  Klebs-Loeffler  bacillus  is  destroyed  by 
exposure  to  a  temperature  of  54°  C.  (130°  F.)  for  ten 
minutes,  if  not  in  a  dry  state.  Thorough  room 
disinfection  is  also  necessary  after  the  patient  has 
recovered  (see  page  16),  as  the  baciUi  may  be  found 
on  walls  and  furniture,  and  can  probably  live  on 
under  these  conditions  for  a  fortnight  (see  page  18). 

Finally,  by  way  of  prophylaxis  it  is  often  advisable 
to  give  a  small  dose  of  anti-diphtheritic  serum  to  all 
those  who  have  been  in  immediate  contact  with  the 
patient.  The  necessity  for  this  somewhat  elaborate 
precaution  must  be  decided  in  each  instance  by  the 
medical  man  in  charge.  In  the  opinion  of  some 
recent  authorities  prophylactic  injections  of  antitoxin 
should  only  be  given  to  weakly  children  who  have 
been  exposed  to  a  particularly  virulent  type  of 
infection,  and  to  those  who  are  suffering  from  some 
other  disease,  such  as  scarlet  fever  or  measles. 

J.  M.  F.-B. 


85 


CHAPTER  XL 

TYPHOID  FEVER. 

(Enterica,  Enteric  Fever.) 

French:  Fievre  Typhoide. 
German:  Abdominal-Typhus. 

TYPHOID  fever  is  an  acute  specific  disease  with  a 
somewhat  prolonged  course,  characterized  by 
the  formation  of  ulcers  in  certain  parts  of  the  small 
intestine,  a  distinctive  rash,  and  more  or  less  severe 
general  depression  of  the  system. 

History. — ^The  medical  writers  in  classical  times, 
although  conversant  with  typhoid  fever,  did  not 
differentiate  it  from  other  superficially  similar  con- 
ditions. It  was  not,  indeed,  until  the  beginning  of 
the  nineteenth  century  that  the  distinction  between 
typhoid  and  typhus  or  jail  fever  was  made  ;  the 
latter  disease,  now  very  uncommon  in  England, 
suggested  the  name  by  which  the  fever  now  under 
consideration  is  generally  known,  because  it  was 
thought  so  similar  in  many  of  its  features.  The 
final  differentiation  of  typhoid  from  typhus  was  made 
by  Sir  William  Jenner  in  the  middle  of  the  last 
century.  Various  theories  were  held  as  to  the 
causation  of  typhoid,  mainly  based  on  the  view  that 
it  was  connected  with  defective  drainage.  The  great 
sanitary  advance  made  in  the  mid- Victorian  period 
decreased  the  incidence  of  the  disease  considerably, 
but  it  was  not  until  1880,  when  Eberth  discovered 


86      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


the  bacillus  of  typhoid,  that  the  way  in  which 
epidemics  arose  was  understood. 

Bacteriology. — very  large  amount  of  important 
work  has  been  devoted  to  this  subject  since  1880. 
The  bacillus*  is  closely  related  to  one  of  the  normal 
denizens  of  the  intestinal  canal  of  man  and  many 
other  terrestrial  animals,  called  the  Colon  bacillus. 
It  is  present  in  the  intestines  of  infected  persons,  but 
its  presence,  in  the  early  stages  of  the  disease,  is  not 
easily  demonstrated,  so  that  (unlike  diphtheria)  no 
ready  means  of  diagnosis  can  be  obtained  by  an 
examination  of  the  stools.  It  is  also  present  in  the 
blood,  but  here,  too,  technical  difficulties  deprive 
this  fact  of  practical  apphcation.  A  patient  suffering 
from  typhoid  fever,  however,  in  a  very  large  propor- 
tion of  cases,  develops  certain  substances  in  his 
blood  about  the  end  of  the  first  week  of  the  disease 
which  produce  a  typical  reaction  when  added  to  a 
pure  culture  of  the  bacillus  of  Eberth. 

The  careful  study  of  this  reaction  by  Durham  and 
Bordet  in  1895  was  followed  in  1896  by  its  apphcation 
to  practical  medicine  almost  simultaneously  by 
Widal  and  Griinbaum ;  it  is  now  usually  known  as 
Widal's  test.  In  practice,  a  few  drops  of  the  patient's 
blood  are  drawn  into  a  small  glass  bulb  and  sent  to 
a  bacteriologist,  who  reports  on  the  dilution  of  this 
blood  which  gives  the  characteristic  reaction  with 
the  bacillus,  known  as  "  agglutination  "  or  "  clump- 
ing." If  the  blood  in  high  dilution  gives  the  reaction, 
the  diagnosis  is  practically  certain  ;  lower  dilutions 
are  not  so  conclusive,  and  a  negative  reaction  does 
not  absolutely  prove  that  the  case  is  not  one  of 


*  Now  generally  known  as  the  Typhoid  Bacillus,  Bacillus 
typhosus,  or  Eberth's  Bacillus. 


TYPHOID  FEVER 


87 


typhoid.  Patients  who  have  previously  suffered 
from  typhoid  fever,  may  sometimes  show  the  char- 
acteristic reaction  in  their  blood  for  a  long  time 
after  recovery,  in  a  few  cases  even  for  years.  In 
some,  the  reaction  is  only  developed  late  in  the 
course  of  the  disease,  and  in  one  remarkable  instance 
it  was  absent  during  the  primary  attack  and  also 
during  several  relapses,  being  at  last  present  in  what 
proved  to  be  the  final  relapse.  In  a  suspected  case, 
therefore,  the  test  if  at  first  negative  should  be 
periodically  repeated.  The  limit  of  error  from  all 
sources  is  probably  about  5  per  cent. 

Mode  of  Infection. — ^The  bacillus  of  typhoid  is  prob- 
ably always  swallowed,  and  thus  reaches  the  small 
intestine,  where  it  lodges,  grows  and  multiphes.* 

The  principal  ways  in  which  the  bacillus  may 
reach  the  mouth  and  thus  get  taken  into  the  body 
are  as  follows  : — 

I.  Directly  from  another  patient.  A  person  suffer- 
ing from  typhoid  is  continuously  giving  off  the 
bacilli  both  in  the  stools  and  urine.  Under  these 
circumstances  his  skin,  clothes,  and  surroundings 
generally  are  practically  certain  to  become  con- 
taminated, and  contact  with  him  or  his  belongings 
leads  to  the  transference  of  the  bacilli  on  to  the 
hands  and  persons  of  others,  who  then  ingest  these 
bacilli  and  acquire  the  disease.  Dirt  and  overcrowd- 
ing obviously  facilitate  the  direct  transference  of  the 
disease  and,  in  fact,  the  ordinary  cleanliness  of  the 
well-to-do  educated  classes  in  this  country  would  not 
be  sufficient  to  prevent  its  spread  from  the  sick  to 
the  healthy,  in  the  absence  of  special  precautions. 

*  Recently,  however,  the  view  has  been  put  forward  that 
the  bacillus  enters  the  body  by  the  tonsils,  and  is  excreted 
into  the  intestine. 


88      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

2.  Articles  of  food,  especially  milk,  butter  and 
cream,  handled  by  infected  persons,  or  those  in 
contact  with  infected  persons,  may  easily  transfer 
the  bacillus  to  others.  "  Ice  creams  "  sold  in  the 
streets  have  many  times  been  a  source  of  infection. 

3.  The  stools  of  a  typhoid  patient  may  be  thrown 
into  a  faultily  constructed  drain,  through  which 
sewage  percolates  into  the  sources  of  a  water  supply. 
Thus  the  bacillus,  which  lives  quite  comfortably  in 
water,  may  be  spread  broadcast,  either  when  the 
water  is  used  for  drinking  or  when  it  is  employed 
for  washing  articles  in  which  food  is  placed,  such  as 
milk  cans,  dishes,  cups  and  the  Hke.  Water-borne 
epidemics  are  well-known. 

4.  Contaminated  material  may  be  left  exposed  to 
the  air,  and  flies  settling  upon  it  may  carry  the 
bacillus  on  to  articles  of  food  to  be  consumed  by 
others. 

5.  In  dusty  regions,  the  dust  may  similarly  act  as 
a  carrier. 

.  6.  Sewage,  when  contaminated  by  typhoid  bacilli, 
may  carry  them  to  oyster  and  mussel  beds,  and  so 
infect  those  who  consume  these  shell  fish  in  the  raw 
condition. 

7.  It  has  recently  been  shown  both  in  this  country 
and  Germany,  that  a  certain  number  of  persons  who 
have  had  typhoid  fever  continue  to  carry  the  bacilli 
in  their  intestines  and  elsewhere  for  long  and  in- 
definite periods.  These  are  the  "  typhoid  carriers," 
and  their  treatment  from  a  pubHc  health  point  of 
view  is  still  an  anxious  and  much-debated  question. 
A  certain  intermittence  has  been  noted  in  their  power 
of  infecting  others,  which  does  not  tend  to  simphfy 
the  problem. 

Incidence— Typhoid  fever  is  widely  distributed 


TYPHOID  FEVER 


89 


over  the  globe.  It  is  essentially  a  disease  of  young 
adults,  but  children  over  five  are  not  infrequently 
affected.    It  is  rare  in  the  aged. 

Clinical  Course— Th.&  incubation  period  in  typhoid 
is  apparently  usually  about  a  fortnight,  but  many 
cases  are  recorded  in  which  it  has  been  much  shorter, 
and  some  in  which  it  has  been  extended  to  three 
weeks. 

Quarantine  is  not  as  a  rule  an  effective  agent  in 
arresting  the  spread  of  an  epidemic,  because  with 
the  discovery  of  the  cause  the  occurrence  of  fresh 
cases  should  immediately  cease.  When  under  special 
circumstances  it  is  applicable  it  should  last  for  three 
weeks. 

The  period  of  invasion  in  typhoid  is  some- 
what indefinite  in  the  early  stages.  The  disease 
begins  to  show  itself  very  gradually,  little  being 
noticed  at  first  but  slight  feelings  of  indisposition. 
Gradually  these  increase  ;  there  is  slight  shivering, 
headache,  and  perhaps  abdominal  pain.  The  bowels 
are  usually  confined  ;  but  there  may  be,  on  the  other 
hand,  diarrhoea.  Often  there  is  a  slight  cough, 
sometimes  vomiting,  and  sometimes  nose-bleeding. 
With  these  symptoms  fever  gradually  sets  in,  and  the 
temperature  usually  rises  a  little  higher  every  evening, 
and  fails  to  fall  quite  so  low  every  morning  as  on  the 
previous  one,  till  at  the  end  of  a  week  or  so  it  reaches 
101°  or  102°  or  more  in  the  evening,  only  dropping  a 
degree  or  two  lower  in  the  morning. 

When  this  stage  has  been  reached  the  period  of 
invasion  may  be  considered  ended,  and  the  patient 
enters  into  a  condition  of  high  fever,  usually  with 
much  prostration,  which  may  last  one  or  two  weeks 
or,  in  severe  cases,  much  longer.  In  a  typical  case  of 
average  severity  the  patient  during  this  period  is  in  a 


90      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


peculiarly  apathetic,  dull,  and  prostrate  condition. 
He  exhibits  little  interest  in  his  surroundings,  is 
extremely  stupid  mentaUy,  often  more  or  less  deaf, 
and  at  night  may  be  slightly  dehrious.  There  is  often 
some  loose  cough,  the  headache  continues,  the  mouth 
becomes  dry  and  parched,  and  the  tongue  coated 
with  whitish  or  brown  fur,  especially  in  the  middle, 
while  the  tip  and  sides  are  left  red.  The  abdomen 
is  distended,  and  if  there  is  diarrhoea  the  stools  are 
of  a  characteristic  yellow,  fluid  nature,  and  have 
been  compared  to  pea-soup.  They  are  usually  very 
offensive. 

On  or  about  the  sixth  day  a  number  of  small 
raised  pink  spots  appear  on  the  abdomen  and 
sometimes  elsewhere,  which  bear  a  strong  likeness  to 
flea  bites.  There  is,  however,  no  small  dark  central 
point  which  marks  the  spot  where  the  proboscis  of 
the  insect  enters  the  skin.  When  lightly  pressed  the 
pink  colour  of  the  spots  completely  disappears.  They 
are  called  the  "  rose  spots,"  and  are  usually  described 
as  lenticular  or  lentil  shaped.  They  come  out  in 
crops  during  this  and  the  following  stages  of  the 
disease,  each  crop  lasting  two  or  three  days,  and  vary 
very  much  both  in  number  and  distribution.  They 
are  present  in  at  least  half  the  cases,  or  perhaps 
more.  The  spleen  is  always  enlarged,  and  this 
enlargement  can  be  demonstrated  by  examination 
in  the  majority  of  cases.  Towards  the  close  of  this 
period  the  patient  has  often  become  extremely  thin  ; 
there  is  also  marked  pallor  of  the  skin,  though  the 
cheeks  may  show  small  flushed  areas.  The  ej^es  are  - 
bright  and  clear,  and  the  pulse."  soft,"  that  is,  easily 
compressed  by  the  finger. 

During  the  third  week,  or  perhaps  later,  the 
temperature  should  in  favourable  cases  begin  to  fall 


TYPHOID  FEVER 


91 


in  a  gradual,  step-like  manner,  corresponding  to  its 
rise  during  the  period  of  invasion.  This  is  the  period 
of  defervescence,  and  after  this  a  gradual  return  to 
health  occurs,  the  symptoms  clearing  up  and  the 
patient  usually  becoming  extremely  hungry.  Re- 
lapses, which  usually  resemble  mild  and  shortened 
primary  attacks,  occur  in  some  cases  after  the  tem- 
perature has  become  normal.  Their  frequency 
varies  very  much  in  different  epidemics,  and  they 
may  occur  in  as  much  as  i8  per  cent  of  the  cases. 
Two  or  more  relapses  may  follow  at  intervals. 

After  an  attack  of  typhoid  the  general  physical 
and  mental  powers  of  the  patient  are  often  markedly 
depressed  for  some  months. 

Varieties  of  Typhoid. — In  young  children  typhoid 
is  often  a  mild  disease,  which  is  fortunate,  as  the 
restraints  as  to  movement  which  are  imposed  on 
older  patients  are  almost  impossible  to  enforce. 
Besides  this,  mild  cases  occur  in  adults  in  which, 
though  feehng  ill,  the  patients  are  able  to  get  about 
and  thus  expose  both  themselves  and  others  to  serious 
risks.  A  fatal  and  sudden  complication  may  be  the 
first  symptom  for  which  the  medical  man  is  consulted. 
Severe  cases  are  those  in  which  the  temperature 
remains  high  and  the  period  of  defervescence  does 
not  set  in  during  the  third  or  fourth  week.  Marked 
delirium,  absolute  prostration,  rapidity  and  weak- 
ness of  the  pulse,  and  sometimes  severe  diarrhoea 
characterize  these  cases.  The  later  in  the  disease 
that  the  patient  comes  under  proper  treatment,  the 
more  Ukely  is  it  that  the  attack  will  be  severe. 
Generally  speaking,  children  over  ten  present  the 
same  course  and  symptoms  as  adults.  In  those 
under  that  age  the  onset  is  apt  to  be  less  gradual, 
nervous  symptoms  are  more  marked  in  the  severe 


92      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


cases,  and  complications  are  less  frequent.  The  rash 
is  also  seen  in  a  smaller  percentage  of  cases. 

Dangers  of  Typhoid. — Severe  cases  are  always  the 
cause  of  considerable  anxiety,  as  the  patient  may 
die  from  the  general  poisoning  produced  by  the 
bacillus  of  typhoid.  In  addition  there  are  two  very 
serious  comphcations  or  accidents  which  depend  on 
the  presence  of  the  ulcers  in  the  intestine,  (i)  The 
ulcer  may  become  so  deep  that  only  a  very  thin  layer 
of  the  outer  wall  of  the  bowel  remains  intact.  Some 
slight  cause,  often  not  apparent,  but  which  may  be 
some  sudden  movement  of  the  patient,  the  passage 
of  hard  material  over  the  ulcer,  or  a  little  distension 
of  the  bowel  by  gas,  may  tear  a  hole  in  this  thin 
layer.  This  is  called  "  perforation."  It  usually 
occurs  during  the  third  week,  when  the  ulcerative 
process  is  at  its  height.  It  is  fortunately  not  a 
common  event,  most  statistics  show  that  it  occurs  in 
between  2  and  3  per  cent  of  the  cases,  though  others 
give  a  higher  figure.  This  nearly  always  proves 
fatal,  as  severe  peritonitis  is  set  up  by  the  escape  of 
the  contents  of  the  bowel  into  the  abdominal  cavity. 
Sometimes  immediate  surgical  operation  may  save 
the  patient's  Hfe.  The  earhest  symptoms  are  pain  in 
the  abdomen,  which  may  be  sudden  and  violent,  a 
faU  in  the  temperature,  and  collapse.  In  addition 
there  is  sometimes  a  shght  shivering  fit  and  vomiting. 
In  other  cases,  especially  when  the  patient  is  already 
very  ill  and  almost  comatose,  the  symptoms  may  be 
very  slight  and  ill  defined.  Perforation  is  however 
not  hmited  in  its  occurrence  to  the  severe  types  of 
the  disease,  and  may  arise  in  cases  which  are  regarded 
as  mild.  (2)  The  ulcers  may  bleed  severely.  Slight 
haemorrhages  are  not  very  uncommon  ;  those  suffi- 
ciently serious  to  be  classed  as  a  comphcation  occur 


TYPHOID  FEVER 


93 


in  a  varying  proportion  of  cases,  usually  not  earlier 
than  the  third  week.  It  is  a  more  frequent  compHca- 
tion  than  perforation.  Severe  haemorrhage  probably 
does  not  occur  in  much  more  than  3  per  cent  of  the 
cases,  but  if  the  sHghter  instances  are  counted  in, 
the  percentage  may  be  reckoned  as  at  least  double 
that  figure.  The  symptoms  vary  with  the  amount  of 
blood  lost.  Sometimes  the  only  indication  is  the 
appearance  of  blood  in  the  stools  ;  in  more  copious 
haemorrhages  the  patient  becomes  pale  and  collapsed 
and  his  temperature  falls.  Recovery  may  occur, 
even  when  very  large  amounts  of  blood  are  lost. 

SequelcB  and  Complications. — ^These  are  not  very 
common,  and  need  not  be  described  in  detail. 
Pneumonia  is  perhaps  the  most  frequent ;  then  come 
neuritis,  periostitis  and  bone  disease,  inflammation 
of  the  joints  (arthritis)  and  of  the  middle  ear  (otitis 
media).  The  gall  bladder  also  becomes  inflamed  in 
some  cases. 

General  outline  of  Treatment. — ^The  treatment  of 
typhoid  is  so  much  a  matter  of  special  knowledge  and 
experience,  that  the  details  from  first  to  last  must  be 
left  entirely  to  the  medical  man  in  charge  of  the 
case,  and  to  the  nurses  who,  under  him,  are  responsible 
for  carrying  them  out  successfully.  It  may  not  be 
improper  here,  however,  to  mention  the  main  objects 
which  all  treatment  is  designed  to  secure.  In  the 
first  place  rest,  as  absolute  as  possible,  must  be 
secured  for  the  patient,  not  only  because  the  prolonged 
course  of  the  fever  puts  a  great  strain  on  his  powers, 
but  in  order  to  avoid  the  risks  of  perforation  and 
haemorrhage.  In  the  second  place,  the  diet  is  so 
regulated  and  restricted  that  while  the  maximum 
possible  of  nourishment  is  allowed,  no  hard  or 
indigestible  matter  can  enter  the  intestine  and  damage 


94      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


Still  further  its  ulcerated  walls.  In  the  third  place, 
to  combat  the  damaging  effects  of  the  prolonged 
fever,  cold  sponging  or  sometimes  cold  baths  are 
employed.  This  tends  to  lower  the  temperature  and 
diminish  the  severity  of  the  nervous  symptoms.  Drugs 
are  employed  to  a  certain  extent,  some  with  a  view 
to  disinfecting  the  contents  of  the  bowels  and  others 
to  reduce  the  temperature.  The  latter  class  are  not 
often  employed  in  this  country,  though  in  Germany 
they  seem  to  be  more  extensively  used.  Finally,  it 
may  be  laid  down  that  no  amateur  should  ever 
attempt  to  nurse  a  case  of  typhoid,  however  mild 
may  be  its  symptoms.  A  httle  want  of  experience 
and  training  may  have  the  most  serious  results  for 
the  patient,  and  also  expose  the  nurse  to  the  risk  of 
contracting  the  disease  herself.  Well-trained  and 
careful  nurses  occasionally  take  typhoid  from  their 
patients,  and  the  chances  of  an  untrained  person 
doing  so  are  immensely  greater.  So  far  no  anti- 
typhoid serum  has  been  found  of  any  great  practical 
value  in  treatment. 

Prophylaxis. — Patients  with  typhoid  fever  are 
usually  nursed  in  the  wards  of  general  hospitals, 
along  with  persons  suffering  from  other  diseases. 
Special  precautions,  however,  are  adopted,  and  as 
these  are  somewhat  elaborate,  in  most  hospitals  there 
is  a  rule  which  Umits  the  number  of  typhoid  cases 
which  may  be  nursed  at  one  time  in  a  ward.  In 
private,  however,  typhoid  patients  should  be  isolated 
as  are  other  infectious  cases,  though  where  the 
nurses  are  quite  trustworthy  and  the  general  arrange- 
ments adequate,  there  could  be  no  objection  to 
responsible  persons  occasionally  visiting  the  patient, 
at  the  discretion  of  the  doctor. 

The  infection  of  typhoid  being  spread  by  the  stools 


TYPHOID  FEVER 


95 


and  urine  of  the  patient,  these  must  always  be 
disinfected  before  being  thrown  into  the  drains,  and 
hnen  and  washable  articles  must  be  soaked  in  disin- 
fectant before  being  washed  (see  page  21).  All 
utensils  used  in  feeding  and  otherwise  ministering  to 
the  patient  should  be  kept  for  his  use  alone  and 
specially  washed,  and  a  special  lavatory  and  sink 
should  be  reserved  for  deaUng  with  such  articles. 
They  are  also  to  be  disinfected  after  use.  The  room 
in  which  a  typhoid  patient  has  been  nursed  may  be 
disinfected  after  his  recovery,  and  the  bedding  and 
blankets  sterihzed  by  steam.  Careful  investigation 
as  to  the  origin  of  the  infection  will  have  to  be  made 
in  conjunction  with  the  local  sanitary  authority. 
This  will  include  an  examination  of  the  milk  supply, 
the  water  supply,  and  the  drainage  system,  together 
with  any  other  possible  source  of  food  infection,  such 
as  may  occur  in  the  case  of  oysters,  ice-creams,  or 
uncooked  vegetables.  As  patients  who  have  appar- 
ently recovered  may  still  continue  to  discharge 
typhoid  bacilU  in  their  stools  and  urine,  specimens 
of  these  should  always  be  sent  to  a  bacteriologist 
for  examination  before  these  persons  are  again 
allowed  to  mix  with  others,  and  they  should  not  be 
regarded  as  free  from  infection  until  the  bacilli  are 
no  longer  found  to  be  present. 

Recently  considerable  success  has  attended  the 
preventive  inoculation  of  a  typhoid  vaccine  in  those 
who  are  Hkely  to  be  exposed  to  infection.  Although 
it  does  not  in  all  cases  confer  absolute  immunity, 
it  considerably  diminishes  the  risk  of  a  severe  attack. 
The  usefulness  of  the  method  is,  however,  somewhat 
impaired  by  the  fact  that  for  a  short  time  after  the 
inoculation  has  been  made  the  individual  is  rendered 
more  Uable  to  contract  the  disease,  so  that  it  is  unwise 


96      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

to  inoculate  those  who  are  aheady  in  the  danger  zone. 
Three  inoculations  are  made  during  successive  weeks, 
and  the  last  should  be  some  weeks  before  any  special 
risk  of  infection  is  hkely  to  occur.  The  inoculations 
are  entirely  without  serious  risk,  though  for  a  few 
days  there  may  be  temporary  symptoms  of  an 
unpleasant  character,  such  as  pains,  fever,  and  the 
like. 

PARATYPHOID  FEVER. 

There  are  several  strains  of  bacilli  which  are 
closely  related  to  the  typhoid  bacillus  and  are  also 
capable  of  setting  up  disease  in  human  beings. 
They  are  collectively  known  as  the  paratyphoid 
group.  The  infection  they  set  up  resembles  typhoid 
clinically,  but  ulcers  are  not  usually  present  in  the 
intestines.  The  blood  of  these  patients  fails  to  give 
the  "  Widal  reaction  "  with  the  bacillus  of  Eberth, 
but  gives  a  similar  reaction  with  one  or  other  of  the 
members  of  its  own  group. 

J.  M.  F.-B. 


97 


CHAPTER  XIL 

CEREBRO-SPINAL  MENINGITIS. 

(Spotted  Fever). 
French:  Meningite  Cerebro-spinal  epidemique. 
German :  Epidemische  Genickstarre. 

CEREBRO-SPINAL  meningitis  is  a  specific  in- 
fectious disease,  due  to  an  inflammation  of  the 
membranes  covering  the  brain  and  spinal  cord, 
characterized  by  fever,  a  peculiar  rigidity  in  certain 
muscles,  and  in  some  cases  by  a  rash,  and  Hable  to 
cause  permanent  damage  to  the  brain  and  special 
senses  in  those  cases  which  recover. 

History. — It  is  probable  that  this  form  of  meningitis 
was  not  in  former  times  properly  distinguished  from 
others,  the  causal  organism  and  the  methods  for 
detecting  it  having  only  been  described  in  recent 
years.  A  resemblance  in  the  rash  to  that  of  typhus 
fever  has  also  led  to  confusion  in  the  reports  of 
earlier  epidemics.  Four  great  epidemics  have  been 
described  between  1805  and  1885,  and  four  others 
since  then  in  New  York  (1894-5),  Glasgow  (1906-7), 
Germany  (1905-6),  and  Belfast  (1907-8).  Besides 
this  form  of  meningitis,  "  sporadic  "  cases,  that  is 
single  instances  which  have  not  spread,  are  recognized 
as  not  infrequently  occurring,  and  are  often  known 
as  "  posterior  basic  meningitis."* 

*  These  may  however  be  due  to  a  slightly  different 
organism. 

7 


98      INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


Bacteriology.— The  causal  organism  was  discovered 
by  Weichselbaum  in  1885  *  It  is  thought  to  gain 
access  to  the  system  through  the  nose  and  throat, 
whence  it  makes  its  way  into  the  spaces  surrounding 
the  brain  and  spinal  cord ;  it  may  also  be  found  in 
the  blood.  It  is  capable  of  existing  in  the  nose  and 
throat  (of  adults  especially)  without  producing 
symptoms,  and  these  "  carriers  "  are  thought  to  be 
an  important  factor  in  setting  up  an  epidemic.  The 
organism  can  be  fairly  easily  recognized  in  the  fluid 
which  surrounds  the  spinal  cord,  and  this  fact  has 
been  utilized  in  the  diagnosis  of  the  disease.  In  a 
suspected  case,  a  hollow  needle  is  thrust  into  the 
spinal  cavity  between  the  vertebrae  of  the  loin,  and 
some  of  the  spinal  fluid  is  withdrawn  by  means  of 
a  syringe  and  examined  by  a  bacteriologist. 

This  procedure  is  found  to  be  perfectly  safe  provided 
certain  precautions  as  to  asepsis  are  taken,  and  has 
now  become  a  routine  method. 

Mode  of  Infection. — ^This  has  already  been  indicated, 
but  the  subject  is  not  yet  quite  completely  understood. 
The  disease  does  not  appear  to  be  highly  infectious 
from  one  person  to  another  ;  "  carriers  "  are  probably 
an  important  Hnk  in  tracing  the  spread  of  an  epidemic. 
Overcrowding  no  doubt  increases  the  chances  of  an 
epidemic  occurring,  and  the  outbreaks  are  often 
"  institutional "  in  character,  affecting  a  limited 
number  of  persons  in  a  school,  a  barrack,  or  an 
asylum. 

Incidence. — Cerebro-spinal  meningitis  is  mainly 
seen  in  children,  but  adults  are  also  attacked.^  It 


*  It  is  known  by  the  somewhat  cumbrous  name  of  the 
Micrococcus  intracellularis  meningitidis.  Frequently  "  for 
short "  it  is  called  Weichselbaum's  meningo-coccus. 


CEREBROSPINAL    MENINGITIS  99 


has  been  observed  in  many  parts  of  the  world,  and 
epidemics  are  most  frequent  in  the  winter  and  spring. 

Clinical  Course. — The  incubation  period  has  not 
been  determined  with  any  certainty ;  probably  it  is 
only  a  few  days. 

The  quarantine  period  cannot  therefore  be  laid 
down,  but  it  would  be  reasonable  to  isolate  "  carriers  " 
until  a  bacteriological  examination  showed  they  were 
free  from  the  organism.  Secondary  cases  have  been 
observed  to  occur  a  month  after  the  primary  batch, 
but  the  bearing  of  this  on  a  possible  quarantine  is 
not  at  present  clear. 

The  onset  of  the  disease  is  in  most  cases  remarkably 
sudden  and  is  marked  by  two  main  features,  severe 
headache  and  vomiting.  Sometimes  for  a  few  days 
or  hours  before  the  definite  onset  there  are  vague 
feelings  of  illness,  sometimes  these  are  entirely 
absent,  and  the  patient  may  fall  down  suddenly  in 
the  street  or  elsewhere  with  intense  giddiness  and 
headache.  The  temperature  rises  abruptly  to  102° 
or  104°,  and  for  the  first  few  days  the  patient  may 
have  all  the  appearances  of  one  suffering  from  acute 
pneumonia.  The  breathing  is  disproportionately 
rapid,  the  face  flushed,  the  eyes  bright  and  perhaps 
bloodshot,  and  there  is  abundant  herpes  (small  crops 
of  vesicles)  round  the  corners  of  the  mouth  and  nose. 
Usually,  however,  quite  early  there  is  some  stiffness 
and  rigidity  in  the  muscles  of  the  neck  and  perhaps 
the  back,  and  the  signs  of  pneumonia  cannot  be  heard 
in  the  lungs.  The  rash,  which  consists  of  small 
haemorrhages  under  the  skin  of  a  purplish  colour 
and  not  fading  when  pressed,  appears  usually  on  the 
fourth  or  fifth  day,  and  may  continue  to  come  out 
in  crops  throughout  the  illness.  It  is  by  no  means 
always  present,  however,  and  varies  very  much  in 


100     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

extent  and  distribution.  During  the  height  of  the 
fever  the  mental  condition  varies  with  the  severity 


of  the  illness.  In  bad  cases  the  patient  may  be  com- 
pletely unconscious  or  actively  delirious.    In  mild 


PLATE  IV. 


Juice  pas'c  loi 


CEREBROSPINAL    MENINGITIS  101 


cases  there  is  only  drowsiness  or  hardly  any  inter- 
ference with  the  mental  functions.  The  worst  cases 
may  die  in  thirty-six  hours — ^usually  too  early  for  a 
diagnosis  to  be  made — others  may  live  a  few  days. 
In  less  severe  attacks  after  a  day  or  two  the  vomiting 
ceases,  but  the  comatose  condition  deepens  gradually  ; 
the  stiffness  of  the  back  increases,  so  that  it  becomes 
arched  backwards,  the  patient  resting  on  his  heels 
and  the  back  of  his  head  (opisthotonos)  ;  or  the  head 
becomes  excessively  drawn  back  and  rigidly  fixed  in 
that  position.  Sometimes  there  is  tenderness  of 
the  skin;  groups  of  muscles  become  weakened  or 
paralysed  ;  squint  and  irregular  movements  of  the 
eyes  develop ;  and  the  breathing  becomes  very 
irregular  in  rhythm  and  perhaps  slow  and  sighing  at 
intervals.  The  fever  continues  high,  the  coma 
deepens,  restlessness  is  succeeded  by  ominous  quiet, 
and  the  patient  dies  within  the  first  fourteen  days 
from  the  onset  of  the  symptoms. 

No  disease,  however,  shows  more  variation  in  type 
and  symptoms  than  cerebro-spinal  meningitis.  The 
temperature  is  occasionally  quite  low,  even  in  fatal 
cases ;  the  rash  is  more  often  absent  than  present ; 
the  patient  though  in  extremis  may  retain  his  full 
consciousness;  or  after  more  than  three  weeks  of 
severe  illness  may  recover  completely. 

The  longer  the  acute  symptoms  last  the  more 
likely  is  the  patient  to  pass  into  the  chronic  stage, 
provided  he  survives.  This  is  characterized  by  the 
same  variations  which  mark  the  acute  stage.  Some- 
times periods  of  acute  illness  resembling  that  just 
described  alternate  with  others  in  which  the  tempera- 
ture faUs  to  normal  and  aU  the  symptoms  subside. 
In  others  the  temperature  is  quite  irregular,  in 
others  again  it  may  be  normal  or  subnormal.'  A 


102     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

marked  feature  in  the  chronic  stage  is  the  persistent 
and  extreme  emaciation,  which  occurs  in  spite  of  the 
fact  that  the  patient  usually  takes  his  food  well. 
A  patient  may  die  at  any  period  of  the  chronic  stage, 
either  suddenly  from  collapse,  or  with  an  access  of 
fever  and  delirium  ;  or  gradually,  in  a  semi-comatose 
condition,  may  sink  to  his  end.  Varied  forms  of 
paralysis,  usually  temporary,  are  seen  during  this 
period,  and  not  infrequently  the  patient  becomes 
both  deaf  and  bhnd.  In  cases  which  ultimately 
recover,  the  paralysis  and  sometimes  the  bUndness 
pass  away,  but  the  deafness  is  usually  permanent  and 
complete.  The  duration  of  the  chronic  stage  may 
be  for  several  months. 

The  mortality  from  cerebro-spinal  fever  is  very 
high  ;  in  many  epidemics  more  than  three-quarters 
of  the  cases  have  died,  but  possibly  the  employment 
of  the  serum  treatment  may  considerably  reduce  this 
terrible  percentage  in  the  future. 

The  Serum  Treatment. — large  number  of  sera 
have  been  prepared,  mostly  with  a  view  to  injection 
under  the  skin,  but  the  results  obtained  have,  on 
the  whole,  been  disappointing.  A  more  promising 
preparation  is  the  serum  of  Flexner,  which  is  injected 
directly  into  the  spinal  canal.  This  serum  should 
always  be  used  when  it  can  be  obtained,  but  failing 
this,  one  of  the  others  may  be  tried,  as  they  cannot 
make  the  outlook  worse,  and  may  perhaps  improve  it. 

Prophylaxis. — ^The  patients  should,  in  cases  occur- 
ring in  schools  and  private  houses,  be  isolated,  just  as 
typhoid  patients  are  isolated,  though  in  general 
hospitals  they  can  be  safely  nursed  in  the  wards  under 
suitable  precautions.  Where  possible,  a  bacterio- 
logical examination  should  be  made  of  the  nose  and 
throat  organisms  of  all  who  have  been  in  contact 


CEREBROSPINAL    MENINGITIS  103 

with  the  cases,  and  if  any  are  found  to  harbour  the 
micrococcus  they  should  be  isolated  and  treated  with 
antiseptic  mouth-  and  nose- washes.  All  the  secretions 
from  the  mouth  and  nose  of  patients  should  be  disin- 
fected, and  all  feeding  and  drinking  vessels  treated 
as  are  those  used  in  typhoid  cases.  A  thorough 
cleaning  and  disinfection  of  houses  where  patients 
have  Hved,  or  in  which  they  have  been  nursed,  should 
be  carried  out,  as  the  organism  sometimes  appears  to 
cHng  to  rooms  and  buildings. 

J.  M.  F.-B. 


104 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
EPIDEMIC  POLIOMYELITIS. 

BRIEF  note  on  this  disease,  which  has  recently 


^  attracted  considerable  attention,  may  not  be 
without  interest  in  a  work  such  as  the  present,  al- 
though a  detailed  consideration  of  the  many  points 
still  under  discussion  is  not  possible.  For  the  last 
twenty-five  years  it  has  been  recognized  that  a 
form  of  paralysis,  so  usually  limited  to  children  as  to 
be  commonly  known  as  "  Infantile  Paralysis,"  occa- 
sionally occurred  in  groups,  and  its  infective  nature 
has  been  suggested  in  most  medical  text-books. 
During  the  last  six  years  definite  epidemics  have  been 
observed  in  many  countries,  such  as  Norway  (1903-6) 
New  England  (1907),  New  York  (1907),  Australia, 
The  Rhine  Provinces  (1909),  Lower  Austria  (1909), 
France  (1910),  while  less  extensive  ones  occurred  in 
Essex  (1908),  New  York  (1909),  and  North  Devon 
{191 1).  In  1910,  indeed,  the  disease  appeared  in  a 
large  number  of  countries  at  once.  The  epidemics 
have  in  some  instances  followed  those  of  cerebro- 
spinal meningitis,  and  in  others  they  have  coincided 
with  them.  The  diseases  are,  however,  quite  distinct, 
epidemic  pohomyelitis  being  due  to  an  extremely 
minute  organism  which  has  not  yet  been  isolated  ;  it 
passes  through  a  bacterial  filter,  and  is  probably  too 
small  to  be  visible  by  means  of  the  microscope.  It 


EPIDEMIC    POLIOMYELITIS  105 


may  belong  to  the  same  class  as  the  unseen  virus 
which  is  responsible  for  rabies  or  hydrophobia. 

Epidemic  poliomyelitis  is  only  feebly  infective,  and 
the  mode  of  infection  is  not  clearly  understood.  The 
incubation  period  seems  usually  to  be  about  a  week, 
but  varies  very  much  in  experimental  cases  (four  to 
forty-six  days  in  monkeys).  The  onset  is  usually 
with  fever,  vomiting,  and  convulsions,  followed  by 
pains  which  may  easily  be  mistaken  for  those  of  acute 
rheumatism.  In  some  epidemics  catarrh  and  inflam- 
mation of  the  nose  and  throat  are  constant]y  observed. 
In  others  these  symptoms  are  absent.  In  many  cases 
again,  there  are  intestinal  disturbances  such  as 
diarrhoea.  Paralysis  of  groups  of  muscles  or  entire 
limbs  generally  occurs  within  a  week,  and  is  followed 
by  wasting  of  the  affected  parts.  In  most  instances, 
however,  only  a  portion  of  the  parts  originally 
involved  become  permanently  affected.  A  few  cases 
occur  without  paralysis  or  pain.  Complete  recovery 
is  uncommon  (5  per  cent),  but  recovery  with  only 
shght  paralysis  is  not  infrequent.  A  fatal  issue  during 
the  acute  stage  is  not  frequently  seen,  but  in  some 
epidemics  has  reached  15  per  cent.  There  is  no 
specific  treatment. 

Prophylaxis. — So  little  is  known  of  the  methods  by 
which  the  disease  is  spread  that  it  is  dif&cult  to  lay 
down  definite  rules.  Isolation  for  three  weeks  and 
the  usual  methods  of  disinfection  are  probably  advis- 
able. In  some  cases  dirty  swimming  baths  have  been 
thought  to  spread  the  disease  ;  so  that  for  this,  if  for 
no  other  reason,  all  swimming  baths  should  be  kept 
as  bacteriologically  clean  as  possible. 

Dust  has  been  held  responsible  for  the  spread  of  the 
disease,  and  in  one  epidemic  (Stowmarket,  191 1)  the 
cases  ceased  when  thorough  watering  of  the  streets 


106     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

with  antiseptic  solutions  was  adopted.  Flies  have 
also  been  accused  of  carrying  the  disease ;  but 
epidemics  do  not  always  coincide  with  the  times  in 
which  flies  are  most  prevalent.  The  worst  months 
are  June,  July,  and  August.  Many  slight  and  abor- 
tive attacks  arise  which  may  transmit  the  disease, 
as  may  also  human  "  carriers."  Domestic  animals, 
such  as  hens  and  rabbits,  have  sometimes  been 
thought  to  be  connected  with  the  outbreaks. 

J.  M.  F.-B. 


107 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
INFECTIOUS  DISEASES  OF  THE  EYE. 

EPIDEMICS  of  acute  inflammation  of  the  eyes 
have  long  been  recognized  as  one  of  the 
pathological  troubles  incidental  to  school  life,  and 
are  spoken  of  vaguely  as  "  Ophthalmia,"  or  by  the 
descriptive  term  of  "  Pink  Eye."  The  epidemics 
usually  occur  in  the  spring  and  early  summer,  but 
are  by  no  means  limited  to  such  times.  They  come 
on  suddenly,  and  usually  cannot  be  attributed  to  a 
definite  source,  and  involve  a  very  large  proportion 
of  those  exposed  to  the  morbid  influence.  The 
trouble  very  often  produces  a  much  greater  degree  of 
anxiety  than  the  severity  of  the  symptoms  demands, 
among  parents  and  guardians,  and  consequently 
among  the  school  authorities.  As  a  matter  of  fact, 
however,  the  symptoms  and  incidental  disabiUties, 
as  well  as  their  possible  gravity,  are  not  so  marked  as 
those  of  a  "  cold  "  that  is  recognized  as  "  catching  " 
and  generally  "  runs  through  "  a  household.  The 
symptoms  are  readily  recognized  by  those  who  have 
been  in  contact  with  an  epidemic  ;  a  sense  of  sandi- 
ness  in  one  or  other  eye,  sometimes  both,  accompanied 
by,  it  may  be,  some  watering,  followed  the  next  morn- 
ing or  the  morning  after  by  some  yellowish  discharge 
sticking  the  eyehds  together,  and  in  an  increasing 
degree  for  two  or  three  days  ;  in  those  who  had  one 
eye  affected  first,  the  other  will  take  on  the  same 


108     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


trouble  Within  a  couple  of  days.  The  eyes  become 
very  red  and  bloodshot,  and  in  the  more  severe  cases 
spots  of  haemorrhage  appear  on  the  "  white  "  of  the 
eye.  There  is  generaUy  a  good  deal  of  dazzling  and 
irntabiUty.  After  the  attack  has  reached  its  height, 
It  begins  to  ameliorate,  and  practicaUy  passes  off  in 
from  ten  to  fourteen  days,  though  a  slightly  blood- 
shot appearance,  especially  of  the  inner  surface  of  the 
lids,  may  persist  for  some  days  longer.  Occasionally 
exacerbations  or  recurrences  occur,  and  the  attacks 
may  last  for  four  or  five  weeks  ;  but  ultimately  com- 
plete recovery  may  be  looked  for.  Such  is  the  usual 
order  of  events,  though  variations  occur  ;  for  instance 
sometimes  only  a  few  may  be  affected  ;  at  other 
times  the  attacks  may  not  be  so  short  and  sharp. 

The  means  by  which  the  infection  is  spread  are  not 
clear.  It  is  popularly  supposed  to  be  due  to  using 
the  same  water  and  towels  ;  but  boys,  at  any  rate 
those  in  the  better-class  schools,  where  the  trouble  is 
as  rife  as  elsewhere,  do  not  use  the  same  water  for 
washing,  though  they  may  be  careless  about  their 
towels.  Probably  the  only  measures,  that  are  really 
of  any  avail,  are  prophylactic  ones,  such  as  bathing 
the  eyes  of  those  who  have  not  been  attacked,  with 
some  antiseptic  lotion,  as  saturated  solution  of  boracic 
acid.  Each  person  in  the  infected  area  should  swab 
his  eyes  three  or  four  times  a  day  with  this  lotion,  and 
smear  the  eyelids  and  lashes  with  boracic  ointment 
before  going  to  bed.  The  lotion  is  easily  made  by 
placing  some  boracic  acid  in  a  bottle,  and  adding 
water  as  it  is  used,  so  long  as  some  of  the  boracic  acid 
remains  undissolved  at  the  bottom.  This  bathing, 
however,  is  not  an  easy  matter  to  carry  out  with  boys, 
and  a  more  effectual  expedient  is  to  remove  them  out- 
side the  infected  area,  if  such  a  thing  is  possible. 


INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    OF    THE    EYE  109 

After  the  symptoms  have  set  in,  probably  no  treat- 
ment whatever  is  of  any  avail,  so  far  as  the  actual 
attack  is  concerned,  for  cure  is  brought  about  by  a 
process  of  self-immunization  arising  from  the  disease  ; 
but  to  prevent  the  spread  of  the  infection  and  subse- 
quent comphcations  the  utmost  cleanliness  of  the 
part  must  be  observed. 

This  account  of  the  usual  form  of  the  epidemic 
must  not  conceal  the  fact  that  more  serious  trouble 
may  arise  in  much  the  same  way,  and  thus  no  epidemic 
should  be  hghtly  viewed  until  medical  sanction  has 
authorized  it,  for,  as  will  presently  be  pointed  out, 
the  infection  in  these  epidemics  is  not  always,  though 
such  is  usually  the  case,  of  the  same  kind,  some  being 
more  serious  than  others. 

Besides  these  attacks  of  acute  ophthalmia,  there 
are  other  chronic  forms,  which,  though  they  do  not 
occur  in  epidemics,  are  not  the  less  contagious — 
I  allude  particularly  to  the  form  that  presents 
redness  and  scurfiness  at  the  outer  corners  of  the 
eyes,  where  the  skin  may  be  sore  and  excoriated. 
There  is  no  discharge  of  matter,  but  some  mucus, 
and,  when  the  condition  is  severe,  the  affected  part 
is  wet  and  soppy.  The  condition  is  undoubtedly 
contagious,  is  very  chronic,  and,  when  estabhshed, 
shows  httle  tendency  to  get  better,  or,  in  cleanly 
surroundings,  worse.  It  is  one  of  the  most  satisfac- 
tory troubles  to  treat,  for  however  long  it  has  lasted, 
it  is  easily  cured  by  sulphate  of  zinc  lotion. 

Not  in  the  least  resembling  this,  though  the  descrip- 
tion may  sound  much  the  same,  are  the  red,  scurfy 
edges  of  the  Hds  that  are  so  commonly  seen,  and 
which  are  too  often  taken  as  a  matter  of  course  and 
neglected,  the  consequence  being  that  they  become 
a  hfelong  disfiguring  trouble ;  and,  in  some  cases. 


110     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


from  destruction  of  the  hair  bulbs,  loss  of  the  eye- 
lashes occurs.  Such  a  condition  is  not  infectious  in 
the  ordinary  sense  of  the  word,  but  in  its  estabhshed 
form  is  always  associated  with  infection  of  the  hair 
bulbs  and  the  glands  arranged  along  the  edge  of  the 
lid.  The  cause  of  the  infection  is  present  with  every 
individual,  and  consequently  the  only  precaution 
that  can  be  taken  against  infection  is  to  prevent  an 
unhealthy  condition  of  the  parts. 

Such  occurs  frequently  from  congestion  due  to  eye 
strain  in  those  who  need  spectacles,  or  who  have  a 
natural  intolerance  of  the  parts  to  wind  or  glare.  In 
those  who  show  this  tendency  to  redness  of  the  lids, 
errors  of  refraction  should  be  corrected  and,  when  a 
natural  intolerance  exists,  the  parts  should  be  stimu- 
lated to  a  healthier  and  more  robust  condition  by  the 
inunction  of  yellow  mercurial  ointment,  which  has  at 
the  same  time  the  advantage  of  being  an  antiseptic 
and,  therefore,  destroys  or  prevents  infection. 

Before  proceeding  to  the  more  technical  description 
of  these  infectious  ailments,  their  complications,  and 
treatment,  it  may  be  well  to  draw  attention  to  an 
epidemic  of  ophthalmia  of  a  certain  trivial  kind,  which 
arises  from  more  or  less  mechanical  causes,  such,  for 
instance,  as  exposure  to  a  very  keen,  cold  wind,  or 
non-infective  dust,  in  which  may  be  included  the 
pollen  of  fir  or  other  trees ;  this  especially  has  been 
confounded  with  the  acute  contagious  ophthalmia, 
and  may  certainly  render  the  eyes  more  susceptible 
to  contagious  infection  of  any  kind.  For  the  above 
condition  bathing  with  boracic  acid  lotion  may  well 
be  adopted. 

In  quite  another  category  is  the  irritation  called 
hay-fever,  extreme  in  some  cases,  that  arises  from  the 
pollen  of  flowers  in  those  who  are  susceptible  thereto, 


INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    OF    THE    EYE  111 


and  the  implication  of  the  skin  as  well  as  the  surface 
of  the  eyes  excited  by  the  primula  group,  and,  more 
rarely,  by  certain  other  flowers.  In  these  cases  there 
appears  to  be  an  influence  of  a  certain  chemical  poison. 
The  question,  however,  has  not  been  satisfactorily 
cleared  up. 

It  is  necessary  also  to  mention  that  form  of  oph- 
thalmia that  used  to  be,  and  still  is  to  a  less  extent, 
the  curse  of  the  Poor-law  schools  of  large  cities.  It 
is  this  condition  which  tends  to  raise  the  scare  which 
surrounds  the  term  "  ophthalmia  "  when  it  occurs  in 
better-class  schools.  It  has  been  known  by  various 
names,  such  as  Egyptian  ophthalmia,  workhouse 
ophthalmia,  granular  ophthalmia,  but  it  is  techni- 
cally known  as  trachomatous  ophthalmia.  It  is  not 
ordinarily  met  with  in  better-class  schools,  nor  is 
there  any  danger  that  it  may  become  epidemic  in 
them,  but  individual  cases  now  and  then  occur,  which 
would  be  a  source  of  danger  if  the  patient  were 
allowed  to  remain  with  the  others.  It  would  not  be 
wise,  therefore,  under  any  conditions,  to  allow  such 
a  one  to  remain  at  school,  even  with  the  most  elabor- 
ate precautions.  Scares  of  outbreaks  of  this  trouble 
have  every  now  and  then  occurred,  but  they  have  not 
been  substantiated,  nor  is  there  any  real  danger  for 
somethmg  more  than  infection  is  required  to  give 
rise  to  an  epidemic. 

The  real  difficulty  in  deaUng  with  these  cases  is 
the  recogmtion  of  the  disease,  for  so-called  granula- 
tions occur  quite  commonly  in  the  Hds  of  the  young 
which  have  nothing  in  common  with  trachoma  granu- 
lations, but  with  which  they  are  often  confused.  The 
innocent  granulations  are  commonly  described  as 
foUicles.  They  consist  of  lymphoid  tissue,  like  "  ade- 
noids, and  are  usually  to  be  observed  on  the  inside  of 


112     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


the  lower  lids  near  the  eyeball.  They  are  translucent, 
and  when  present  in  sufficiently  large  numbers  are 
situated  in  rows.  They  do  not  occur  to  any  extent 
in  the  upper  lids,  but  may  be  seen  sometimes  creep- 
ing round  from  the  lower  hd  at  the  inner  and  outer 
corner. 

Other  than  this,  granulations  of  any  kind  on  the 
upper  Ud  should  give  rise  to  the  gravest  suspicion. 
The  granulations  due  to  trachoma  resemble  a  very 
small  boiled  sago  grain.  When  inflamed,  as  they 
frequently  may  be,  they  give  rise  to  a  condition  of 
follicular  ophthalmia  which  can  further  be  classified 
under  the  cause  which  has  given  rise  to  the  inflamma- 
tion. They  arise  in  eyes  that  have  been  subject  to 
irritation  or  eye-strain,  or  excessive  use  of  drops,  such 
as  atropine  or  cocaine.  They  have  been  recently 
described  as  the  result  of  an  attack  of  epidemic 
ophthalmia,  though  in  the  writer's  experience,  while 
they  may  arise  from  any  chronic  irritation,  an  acute 
inflammatory  attack  will  bring  about  their  disap- 
pearance, had  they  been  present.  Such  eyes,  too, 
show  themselves  as  particularly  liable  to  become 
attacked,  when  the  patients  are  present  in  the  infec- 
tive zone  of  an  epidemic.  It  is  always  advisable  to 
get  rid  of  these  foUicles  by  active  treatment  with 
astringents,  and  especially  by  removing  the  cause,  if 
it  can  be  ascertained.  It  is  well,  therefore,  to  add 
that  eye-strain  from  the  need  of  spectacles  is  a  very 
frequent  cause.  From  the  school  point  of  view,  the 
only  treatment  that  need  here  be  mentioned  as 
regards  trachoma  is  as  above  stated,  that  the  boy 
must  be  removed  from  the  school  at  once.  _ 

Of  late  years  scientific  enquiry  into  the  causes  of 
conjunctivitis  has  led  to  considerable  alteration  of  the 
nomenclature  of  this  form  of  disease,  and,  although 


INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    OF    THE    EYE  113 

there  is  still  a  good  deal  of  uncertainty  in  the  share 
that  the  several  micro-organisms,  which  have  been 
discovered,  take  in  the  production  of  the  inflammation, 
yet  they  form  a  good  general  basis  for  the  classifica- 
tion, scientific  study,  and  treatment  of  the  inflam- 
matory conditions  of  the  conjunctiva.  While  laying 
special  stress  on  the  epidemic  produced  by  infection 
with  the  Koch-Weeks  bacillus,  and  the  infectious 
character  of  the  Morax-Axenfeld  diplococcus,  the 
writer  will  do  Httle  more  than  mention  the  other 
forms  of  ophthalmia  due  to  infection,  for  the  study 
of  which  the  reader  is  referred  to  a  more  complete 
treatise. 

Acute  Contagious  Conjunctivitis  ("  Pink-eye," 
Acute  Muco-purulent  Ophthalmia,  etc.). 

Symptoms. — Irritability  and  a  feeling  as  of  sand  in 
the  eye  mark  the  early  stage  after  infection.  Usually 
on  the  second  morning,  the  eyes  are  stuck  together  by 
muco-purulent  discharge,  the  conjunctiva  is  congested, 
the  lids  puffy,  and  free  lacrymation  occurs.  These 
symptoms  increase  in  severity  for  about  two  days, 
and  in  severe  cases  small  conjunctival  haemorrhages 
take  place.  This  stage  lasts  for  three  or  four  days, 
when  the  acute  symptoms  begin  to  subside,  and  after 
ten  days  from  the  outset  little  trace  of  the  attack  is 
left,  except,  may  be,  some  redness  of  the  lids,  and  in 
a  fortnight  most  patients  are  practically  well.  Occa- 
sionally exacerbations  or  relapses  take  place,  and  the 
attack  may  be  prolonged  for'  another  two  or  three 
weeks.  Sometimes  phlyctenules  and  corneal  ulcers 
supervene. 

Cause. — The  inflammation  is  due  to  infection  by 
micro-organisms,  and  that  which  is  present  in  a  very 
large  majority  of  cases  is  the  Koch-Weeks  bacillus  ; 
but  the  pneumococcus  or  influenza  bacillus  may  be 

8 


114     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

found,  in  which  cases  the  attacks  are  usually  milder, 
but  the  microscope  is  needed  for  differentiation. 

Treatment. — Cleanliness  is  all  important,  and  it  is 
very  doubtful  if  anything  more  is  needed,  for  re- 
covery is  due  to  self-immunization,  although  the 
immunity  does  not  necessarily  last  for  long.  When 
relapses  and  exacerbations  occur,  astringents  are 
recommended  ;  but  for  the  usual  cases  some  anti- 
septic wash,  as  a  saturated  solution  of  boracic  acid, 
perchloride  of  mercury  lotion  i  in  9000,  or  diluted 
glycothymoline  is  sufficient.  Some  authorities  re- 
commend more  strenuous  treatment,  such  as  nitrate 
of  silver  or  argyrol.  Where  complications  arise, 
such  as  ulcers  of  the  cornea,  atropine  or  other 
treatment  apphcable  to  the  compUcation  must  be 
used. 

Prophylaxis. — ^This  is  an  important  question,  for 
an  epidemic  of  this  sort  upsets  school  routine  so  much. 
At  the  same  time  precautions,  unless  they  are  very 
thorough,  will  avail  Httle.  The  exact  means  by 
which  the  infection  is  conveyed  is  not  yet  determined. 
The  vitahty  of  the  Koch- Weeks  bacillus  very  readily 
perishes,  and  is  easily  destroyed,  and  the  fact  that 
drying  destroys  it  would  seem  to  indicate  that  it  is 
not  conveyed  by  air  as  one  might  otherwise  suppose. 
Bathing  the  eyes  of  those  who  are  uninfected  two 
or  three  times  a  day  with  some  antiseptic  lotion 
would  certainly  be  valuable,  but  this  must  be  done 
consistently.  Complete  isolation  of  those  infected 
would  also  tend  to  prevent  the  spread  of  the  trouble. 
This  is,  however,  seldom  possible,  and  in  cases 
where  it  would  be,  the  question  arises  whether  such 
a  step  is  required  for  so  comparatively  trivial  a 
disease,  especially  as  no  guarantee  can  be  given 
that  the  trouble  will  not  continue  to  spread. 


INFECTIOUS   DISEASES    OF    THE    EYE  115 

Subacute  Contagious  Conjunctivitis.  (Angu- 
lar Conjunctivitis). 

Symptoms. — Irritability,  with  excoriation  and  a 
soppy  condition,  of  the  skin  at  the  corners  of  the  eyes, 
especially  the  outer,  accompanied  by  redness  of  the 
margins  of  the  Hds.  In  long-continued  cases,  the 
condition  of  the  corners  of  the  eye  may  spread  all 
round  the  Kd  margins.  There  is  no  secretion  of 
matter,  and  the  hds  do  not  tend  to  stick  together. 
There  is,  however,  some  mucous  discharge.  The 
condition  is  especially  chronic,  and  occasionally  small 
ulcers  form  on  the  margin  of  the  cornea. 

Cause. — Infection  by  the  Morax-Axenfeld  diplo- 
baciUus. 

Treatment. — ^The  condition  is  readily  cured  by 
sulphate  of  zinc  drops,  two  grains  to  the  ounce.  If 
ulcers  of  the  cornea  occur,  the  same  drops,  but  half 
the  strength,  combined  with  atropine,  half  a  grain  to 
the  ounce,  should  be  used. 

Trachomatous  Conjunctivitis  need  only  be 
mentioned,  as  such  cases  should  not  be  treated  in 
schools.  A  specific  micro-organism  probably  exists, 
but  has  not  been  definitely  isolated.  Other  condi- 
tions, however,  which  are  not  present  in  high-class 
schools,  are  required,  in  addition  to  the  infective 
virus,  to  bring  about  an  epidemic. 

Membranous  Conjunctivitis  is  a  comparatively 
rare  disease,  usually  due  to  the  presence  of  the 
bacillus  of  diphtheria  or  a  streptococcus,  and  some- 
times to  other  micro-organisms.  The  diphtheria 
bacillus  should  always  be  suspected  and  the  patient 
treated  accordingly.  Besides  the  membranous  form, 
a  mild  attack  of  acute  conjunctivitis  may  be  due  to 
the  streptococcus  occurring  in  cases  of  impetigo. 

Acute   Purulent  Ophthalmia.— This  is  hardly 


116     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

likely  to  occur  in  schools.  The  infection  is  due  to  the 
gonococcus,  and  in  milder  cases  to  the  diplococcus 
catarrhalis  and  meningococcus. 

There  are  other  micro-organisms  which  affect  the 
conjunctiva,  but  which  need  not  be  enumerated 
here ;  it  may,  however,  be  weU  to  mention  that  under 
unfavourable  conditions  of  the  part,  when  its  vitahty 
is  lowered,  the  staphylococcus  aureus  will  excite 
acute  conjunctivitis. 

R.  W.  D. 


117 


CHAPTER  XV. 
RINGWORM.  TINEA. 

RINGWORM  is  a  well-defined  and  distinct 
affection  of  the  skin,  caused  by  different 
varieties  of  a  microscopic  parasite,  and  due  to  a 
minute  fungus  invading  the  outer  layer  of  the  skin, 
the  hair-follicles,  and  the  hairs.  It  is  highly  con- 
tagious; and  when  occurring  on  the  head,  if  not 
properly  treated  in  the  early  stages,  may  rapidly 
spread  and  become  rebellious  to  ordinary  treatment, 
and  seriously  interfere  with  a  child's  education. 

It  is  a  mistake  to  think  ringworm  is  due  to  dirt 
or  want  of  personal  cleanliness.  Dirt  affords  no 
pabulum  for  the  fungus  to  grow  in ;  and  the  disease 
is  not  found  in  a  greater  percentage  in  dirty  and 
neglected  children  than  in  those  who  are  clean. 
Washing  the  head  does  not  prevent  the  fungus  from 
developing  if  it  has  effected  a  lodgement  on  the 
skin. 

The  most  common  age  for  ringworm  of  the  head 
is  from  five  to  eleven  years,  and  about  three  out  of 
four  cases  commence  between  those  ages.  From  the 
examination  of  boys  (coming  from  all  classes)  for 
admission  into  Christ's  Hospital  during  the  last 
forty  years,  I  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that 
ringworm  of  the  head  is  rapidly  declining.  From 
1875  to  1885  I  rejected  (on  account  of  ringworm) 


118     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


about  8  per  cent  of  the  candidates  for  admission  ; 
from  1887  to  1897  this  was  reduced  to  per  cent  ; 
and  during  the  last  ten  years  the  number  rejected 
has  been  only  about  3  to  2  per  cent.  This  proves 
that  ringworm  is  now  diagnosed  and  treated  more 
efficiently  than  formerly,  and  that  by  care  it  ought 
to  become  a  rare  disease. 

Incubation  Period. — ^This  is  uncertain,  but  a  small 
spot  may  form  in  a  few  days  from  the  implanta- 
tion of  the  fungus.  If  the  disease  is  contracted  it 
can  usually  be  detected  by  an  expert  within  a  fort- 
night, but  sometimes  the  fungus  may  remain  latent 
for  a  time. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  say  how  long  any  place  must 
have  existed  before  being  seen,  as  the  rate  of  growth 
varies.  Thus  it  is  unwise  to  give  a  decided  opinion, 
though  an  experienced  observer  can  give  a  fair 
guess.  A  small  place  may  develop  in  twenty-four 
hours,  and  a  moderate  sized  one  in  a  few  days  ;  but 
on  the  other  hand,  a  small  place  may  have  existed 
for  some  time. 

It  is  impossible  to  say  how  long  it  wiU  take  to  cure 
any  case  of  ringworm  of  the  head.  It  may  remain 
uncured,  especially  if  treated  by  the  old  methods 
with  ointments  or  lotions,  for  months  or  even  years. 
In  some  children  the  fungus  takes  but  slight  hold, 
and  is  easily  destroyed,  while  others  are  very  sus- 
ceptible and  the  disease  quickly  spreads. 

The  Fungus*  consists  of  branching  hollow  tubes 
called  mycelia,  and  of  conidia  or  spores  ;  and  when  it 


*  The  Different  Forms  : — 

Tinea  Tonsurans — ringworm  of  the  head ;  and  Tinea 
Circinata — ringworm  of  the  body.  .  . 

Tinea  Tonsurans  is  divided  into:  Microsporon  Audouim 
—tinea  with  small  spores,  and  Tricophyton  megalosporon— 


PLATE  V. 


Fig.  12. — Ringworm  of  i  he  Head.  Tinea  Tonsurans :  ihe 
small  spore  variety,  or  Microspcron  And(ni>ni.      X  300  diani. 

Plates  V,  VI,  VII,  reproduced  by  kind  permission- from 
"Ringworm  and  Alopecia  Areata." 


Face  I>age 


PDA  TE  VI. 


Fig.  13- — Ringworm  of  the  Head.  Tinea  Tonswans:  the 
large  spore  variety,  or  Tricophytoii  Megalosporon^  {cndothrix 
resistant).      X  300  cliam. 


RINGWORM 


119 


invades  the  skin  it  develops  into  mycelium  tubes 
which  pass  between  the  cells  of  the  outer  skin  (epi- 
dermis or  cuticle),  and  cause  irritation  and  inflam- 
mation, and  often  a  ring  of  minute  papules  and 
vesicles.  If  the  head  be  involved,  the  hairs  get 
diseased,  and  the  case  is  infinitely  more  difficult  to 
cure  than  if  the  body  be  the  seat  of  the  disease. 

Diagnosis. — Patches  on  the  body  are  fairly  easy 
to  detect,  but  there  is  no  disease  of  the  skin  in  which 
so  many  mistakes  are  made  in  diagnosis  as  in  ring- 
worm of  the  head  ;  and  when  the  results  of  such 
errors  are  considered,  it  is  surprising  that  those  who 
may  have  to  discover  this  trouble,  or  to  give  certifi- 
cates, do  not  more  thoroughly  acquaint  themselves 
with  the  simple  facts  concerning  its  diagnosis,  and 
what  constitutes  a  "  cure."  Errors  are  often  made, 
and  children  with  well-marked  ringworm  are  even 
certified  to  be  cured  and  sent  back  to  school;  and 
yet  there  are  definite  signs  by  which  anyone  can  tell 
whether  a  child  has  or  has  not  ringworm,  and  mis- 
takes ought  not  to  be  made. 

In  examining  a  head  it  is  essential  to  have  a  good 
lens  and  a  bright  fight  (daylight  best),  and  the  light 
should  be  on  the  right  side  of  the  examiner. 

The  hairs  should  be  turned  up  by  a  pair  of  forceps 
in  the  reverse  way  to  the  growth,  so  as  to  expose  the 
whole  scalp  httle  by  little.  Any  scurfy  spot  should 
be  examined  with  a  lens,  when  any  uneven  or  broken- 
off  hairs  wiU  stand  out  and  be  observed,  even  with  the 
naked  eye. 


tinea  with  large  spores.  The  latter  is  also  divided  into 
M.  endothnx,  the  commoner  variety,  and  M.  ectothrix  the 
rarer.  Then  there  are  two  varieties  of  M.  endothrix— resistant 
(much  the  commoner),  tnd  /ragile  mycelium.  The  latter  is 
rarely  seen  m  so-called  black-dot  and  disseminated  ringworm 


RINGWORM 


121 


with  those  who  are  free ;  but,  as  ringworm  is  con- 
tagious and  not  infectious,  there  is  very  Jittle  risk  of 
children  taking  the  disease  from  simply  being  in  the 
same  room  for  lessons  or  meals  with  a  case  of  ring- 
worm, provided  it  is  under  efficient  treatment. 

One  of  the  commonest  causes  of  the  spread  of  this 
trouble  is  the  contact  of  healthy  children  with  the 
head  of,  or  with  infected  articles  belonging  to,  a 
child  with  chronic,  unknown,  and  therefore  untreated 
ringworm,  which  is  so  often  thought  to  be  scurf  or 
eczema. 

Recent  Ringworm. — At  the  earliest  stage  there 
is  only  a  small  scaly  circular  spot  containing,  perhaps, 
hairs  more  brittle  than  usual,  but  it  is  rare  for  a  case 
to  be  discovered  before  a  few  hairs  are  involved  and 
broken  off.  The  usual  position  is  the  dome  of  the 
head,  and  attention  may  first  be  drawn  to  the  case 
by  the  child  scratching  his  head,  or  by  the  nurse  or 
hair-dresser  observing  a  partly  bare  place. 

The  patches  vary  in  number  from  one  to  many, 
are  more  or  less  circular,  non-symmetrical,  and 
extend  from  the  circumference.  A  typical  patch 
of  small-spore  is  usually  a  marginated  one,  where 
most  of  the  hairs  lie  in  one  direction,  and  easily 
break  off,  "  stumps  "  being  left ;  but  it  is  a  great 
mistake  to  imagine  that  ringworm  on  the  head 
usually  presents  the  appearance  of  a  red  scaly  spot, 
almost  destitute  of  hair,  with  a  raised  edge  and 
decided  ring-hke  form.  This  appearance  of  ring- 
Worm  of  the  body  is  rarely  seen  on  the  head. 

The  part  looks  as  if  nibbled,  and  this  appearance 
is  very  distinctive  and  should  never  be  mistaken  for 
scurf  or  eczema.  In  the  very  early  stage  before  the 
hairs  break,  the  only  way  to  diagnose  the  case  is  to 
examme  the  scales  under  the  microscope  for  mycelium. 


122     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


Stumps.— The  diagnostic  "stumps"  are  short 
broken-off  diseased  hairs,  and  care  must  be  taken  not 
to  confound  them  with  short  cut-off  healthy  hairs. 
It  is  absolutely  useless  to  examine  (or  to  send  up  for 
examination)  healthy  short  cut-off  hairs  for  the 
fungus. 

The  stumps  are  usually  thickened,  lustreless,  and 
easily  broken  off  on  attempted  extraction  with 
forceps;  whereas  healthy  hairs,  or  the  stumps  in 
alopecia*  {Fig.  15)  will  come  out  entire  with  the  root. 
In  cases  of  chronic  ringworm,  especially  after  long 
treatment,  the  stumps  are  often  difficult  to  find,  as 
they  may  be  hidden  amongst  the  long  hairs,  or 
fastened  down  under  scales,  and  only  appear  when 
the  scales  are  carefully  removed.  They  may  even 
be  found  on  the  under-surface  of  the  removed  scales, 
sometimes  twisted  hke  a  corkscrew. 

A  stump  may  sometimes  be  removed  entire  by 
using  very  gentle  traction  with  the  forceps,  but  more 
usually  it  breaks  off  a  Httle  way  down  the  hair- 
follicle,  leaving  the  bulb  and  some  of  the  shaft 
behind.  It  is  this  little  bit  of  hair  (if  a  whole  stump 
cannot  be  extracted)  which  should  be  examined 
under  the  microscope. 

Sometimes  the  stumps,  instead  of  sticking  up,  may 
be  found  lying  close  to  the  surface  of  the  skin,  looking 
dull  and  thickened,  and  often  of  a  hghter  or  yellow 
colour,  and  possibly  glued  to  the  scalp  by  sebaceoum 
matter. 

Microscopical  Examination. — ^The  stumps  should 
be  placed  on  a  glass  sHde  with  a  drop  of  Liq.  potassas, 
and  a  thin  cover-glass  applied.  It  is  best  to  let  the 
specimen  soak  for  an  hour  or  two  to  make  it  trans- 


*  Alopecia  areata — bare  smooth  patches.    (See  page  125.) 


RINGWORM 


123 


parent ;  but  if  it  must  be  examined  at  once,  the  under- 
surface  of  the  glass  sUde  should  be  sUghtly  warmed. 
Prolonged  soaking  brings  the  fungus,  especially  the 
mycelium,  into  view;  and  it  is  better  to  soak  the 
specimen  some  hours  than  to  use  heat,  which  may 
destroy  the  mycehum.  Before  examining,  the  cover- 
glass  should  be  gently  pressed  down,  and  any  excess 
of  potash  removed  by  blotting  paper.  It  is  also 
essential  to  have  a  good  microscope  with  ith  object 
glass,  so  as  to  magnify  about  600  diameters.  Stumps 
appear  opaque  if  examined  too  soon,  or  if  heated  too 
much. 

Often  the  form  of  fungus  can  be  diagnosed  at  once 
as  the  sheath  in  the  small-spore  gets  pressed  out 
on  either  side  of  the  stump,  and  looks  whitish  to  the 
naked  eye. 

Small-spore  Diagnosis.— The  patches  are  usually 
round  and  distinctly  circumscribed,  more  or  less  bare, 
and  sometimes  of  a  greyish  or  slatey  colour.  The 
skin  is  often  raised  above  the  surrounding  level  and 
the  follicles  appear  prominent,  having  the  appearance 
of  "  goose  skin."  The  surface  is  covered  with  dry 
lamellated  scales,  giving  the  place  a  dirty  scaly 
appearance,  and  at  times  slight  crusts  form.  Small 
lustreless,  sheath-like  coverings*  of  a  dull  white  or 
grey  colour,  and  composed  of  innumerable  spores, 
more  or  less  surround  the  bases  of  the  stumps. 
Hundreds  of  these  lying  close  together  give  a 
white  frost-hke  look  to  the  skin.  Almost  all  the 
hairs  are  diseased  on  the  places,  lie  in  one  direction 
without  any  elasticity,  and  if  pulled  generally  break. 
The  diseased  hairs  are  white  and  lustreless,  look 
as  if  covered  with  fine  dust,  and  when  broken  off 
have  a  nibbled  appearance. 


*  Called  the  "  circumpilar  collarette." 


124     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


Under  the  microscope  the  most  conspicuous 
object  is  the  spread-out  mass  of  spores  heaped 
together  on  each  side  of  the  compressed  stump.  The 
chief  characteristic  is  this  mass  of  innumerable 
round  spores,  which  are  not  arranged  in  filaments  or 
linear  series,  or  in  the  distinct  bands  and  strings  of 
beads  found  in  the  large-spore.  They  He  one  against 
the  other  without  any  definite  arrangement,  forming 
a  mosaic  by  mutual  pressure  outside  the  hair. 

The  surface  of  the  hair  is  eroded,  and  mycelial 
threads  can  be  seen  on  the  hair  and  in  its  substance, 
and  end  at  the  neck  of  the  bulb  in  a  long  terminal 
fringe  of  delicate  threads  characteristic  of  the  small- 
spore. 

Large-spore  Diagnosis. — In  both  varieties  the 
skin  is  much  smoother  than  in  the  small-spore,  and 
at  times  only  broken-off  stumps  are  to  be  found. 
There  are  no  sheaths,  and  no  frost-hke  look  of  the 
skin.  The  places  are  generally  smaller,  but  large 
patches  may  exist  with  the  hah  growing  freely,  except 
that  numerous  stumps  are  to  be  found  scattered 
amongst  the  healthy  hairs.  If  the  stumps  are 
scattered  about  it  is  called  "disseminated  ring- 
worm ;  "  and  "  black  dots  "  may  be  present,  due 
to  rubbing  down  of  the  stumps  level  with  the  skin. 
Though  the  places  may  be  smooth  and  healthy 
looking,  at  times— especially  after  treatment— the 
scalp  is  very  scurfy.  This  is  the  form  so  often  over- 
looked, and  thought  to  be  only  scurf.  The  "  stumps  " 
are  generally  seen  mingled  with  the  long  hairs, 
erect,  swollen,  dark,  and  broken  off  very  short ;  and 
may  only  be  found  under  the  scales.  On  attempted 
extraction  they  usually  break  off  very  short. 

Microscopically,  there  is  no  heaped-up  mass  of 
spores  round  the  shaft,  and  no  opaque  mass  spread 


RINGWORM 


125 


out.  Long  chains  of  mycelium,  which  branch  at 
times,  are  found  transversely  divided  at  intervals, 
and  a  fringe  of  mycelium  near  the  bulb,  but  not 
having  such  long  threads  as  the  small-spore.  The 
mycelium  can  be  seen  in  the  substance  of  the 
hair  forming  bands  of  mycelial  spores.  The  divisions 
are  doubly  contoured,  almost  square,  forming  bands 
like  the  staves  in  a  ladder,  or  in  the  fragile  form  like  a 
string  of  beads.  As  a  rule  no  mycelium  is  seen  on 
the  shaft  outside  the  hair  follicle,  except  from  burst- 
ing of  the  hair.  The  shaft  is  not  eroded  like  the  small- 
spore,  and  the  epithelium  can  be  seen  like  so  many 
minute  tiles  overlapping.  Sometimes  there  is  a 
"  fish-roe  "  look  of  the  masses  of  spores  found  packing 
the  hair,  resembling  a  bag  of  nuts. 

Bald  Ringworm. — ^The  skin  may  be  more  or  less 
smooth  and  clean,  but  the  diagnostic  sign  is  the 
presence  of  some  diseased  stumps,  at  times  broken 
off  and  only  looking  like  "  black  dots."  This  is  a 
rare  and  chronic  form,  and  has  been  confused  with 
true  Alopecia  areata.  It  is  very  difficult  to  get  away 
any  portion  of  the  diseased  stumps,  but  if  examined 
it  will  be  found  to  be  one  mass  of  fish-roe  fungus. 

Diagnosis  from  Alopecia  Areata. — Bald  places 
due  to  true  Alopecia  areata  may  be  thought  to  be 
ringworm,  and  often  have  "  stumps  "  on  them,  and 
even  black  dots.  The  diagnosis  is  easy,  as  patches 
of  alopecia  are  smooth,  white,  with  absence  of  scales 
and  diseased  stumps.  Generally  there  are  some 
typical  club-shaped  stumps,  especially  where  the 
patch  is  enlarging.  The  long  hairs  near  the  place 
may  be  very  loose  and  come  out  easily  when  pulled, 
but  the  skin  is  not  raised,  and  after  a  time  gets 
thinner  and  depressed.  The  stumps  are  typical, 
with  the  ends  larger  than  the  root-part— Hke  a  note 


126     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


of  exclamation  (!)  without  the  dot.  These  stumps 
are  easily  extracted  entire  instead  of  breaking  off,  * 
as  usual  with  the  stumps  from  ringworm.  The 
roots  are  small  and  shrivelled,  and  under  the  micro- 
scope the  bulb  is  observed  to  be  atrophied,  sometimes 
swollen  at  the  upper  portion  and  then  tapering  and 
much  reduced  in  size.  The  shaft  is  found  to  be 
dilated  and  darkened  in  places,  forming  enlargements 
which  are  deeply  pigmented  in  the  centre,  with  a 
large  amount  of  dark  granular  matter  like  pith. 
The  free  end  is  somewhat  club-shaped,  pigmented, 
and  often  exhibits  a  cluster  of  fibres  radiating  out- 
wards in  a  brush-like  form.  No  mycelium  or  spores 
are  to  be  detected,  and  if  found  the  case  is  not  true 
alopecia,  but  bald  ringworm. 

Bald  Spots,  from  cuts  or  injuries,  can  easily  be 
diagnosed  by  their  shape,  the  depression  of  the  skin, 
its  white  appearance,  and  the  absence  of  stumps. 

Diagnosis  of  Chronic  forms  of  Ringworm. — 
It  is  a  great  mistake  to  think  ringworm  is  cured 
because  the  hair  is  growing  again  on  the  affected 
areas.  Some  of  the  most  chronic  cases  are  those  in 
which  the  long  hair  is  growing  freely  again,  but  on 
close  examination  "  stumps  "  can  be  found.  It  is 
impossible  to  write  too  strongly  on  this  point,  as  an 
outbreak  in  a  school  is  generally  due  to  the  admission 
into  it  of  an  over-looked  chronic  case.  Such  are  sent 
back,  even  with  medical  certificates,  as  "  cured " 
and  'fit  for  school,  and  certificates  may  be  given 
without  a  thorough  examination  of  the  head.  Even 
after  children  have  been  said  to  be  cured  by  the 
A;-ray  treatment  I  have  often  found  many  diseased 
stumps  left.  But  apart  from  difficult  cases  to 
diagnose,  I  have  had  children  sent  to  me  cerhfied  as 
"  cured  "'  with  typical  patches  of  ordinary  ringworm. 


RINGWORM 


127 


covered  with  scales  and  scurf,  and  broken  and 
twisted  short  hairs.  On  pointing  this  out  I  have 
been  gravely  informed  that  the  disease  was  "  dried 
up  and  cured,  and  the  stumps  of  no  consequence." 

It  is  often  difficult  to  detect  the  short  diseased 
stumps,  which  only  protrude  an  eighth  of  an  inch 
or  less;  and  no  patch  should  be  considered  " cured " 
until  the  new  downy  hair  commences  to  grow,  and 
the  case  has  been  carefully  watched  for  a  time  after 
aU  treatment  has  been  discontinued.  Stumps  often 
re-appear,  so  the  head  should  be  watched  and  exam- 
ined for  weeks  after  it  seems  to  be  free. 

The  fungus  cannot  be  destroyed  by  parasiticides 
contained  in  ointments  and  lotions,  so  that  the 
diseased  hairs  grow  healthy  again,  but  all  the  diseased 
hairs  must  be  got  out  of  the  hair  follicles,  and  new 
downy  hair  should  grow. 

Atrophied  Stumps.  —  Sometimes,  after  shaving 
or  close  cutting,  some  atrophied  stumps  will  be 
found  though  the  case  is  cured.  The  diagnosis  of 
these  is  easy,  for  they  are  bright  and  fine,  and 
look  like  healthy  hairs.  They  come  out  easily  with 
atrophied  roots,  and  of  course  no  fungus  can  be 
detected. 

Certificates. — It  is  a  wise  precaution  for  school- 
masters to  insist  on  a  certificate  being  obtained  from 
some  well-known  speciahst  when  a  boy  or  girl  returns 
to  school  after  ringworm  of  the  head ;  and  in  all  cases 
the  medical  officer  of  the  school  should  reject  the 
child  if  any  diseased  hairs  are  present. 

Ringworm  of  the  Body  is  also  caused  by  a 
pluraHty  of  fungi,  and  is  often  contracted  from 
animals,  but  may  be  associated  with  ringworm  of 
the  head.  It  should  be  a  golden  rule  always  to 
examine  carefully  the  head  of  a  child  who  has  a 


128    INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


patch  of  ringworm  on  the  body.  If  the  scalp  is  free 
it  IS  easy  to  cure  the  trouble  on  the  body. 

The  place  or  places  are  usually  the  size  of  a  split- 
pea  to  half  a  crown,  or  larger,  with  circular  and  well- 
defined  edges.  They  are  slightly  raised,  covered 
with  fine  scales,  and  enlarge  by  growth  at  the  circum- 
ference, while  the  skin  may  become  more  or  less 
normal  again  in  the  centre.  They  are  often  distinctly 
red,  with  minute  papules  and  vesicles  at  the  edge, 
forming  a  distinct  ring.  The  affection  shows  no 
disposition  to  symmetry,  and  there  is  usually  some 
itching  of  the  skin.  Patches  may  be  seen  on  the 
back  of  the  wrist  having  more  the  appearance  of 
eczema,  but  have  a  well-defined  edge  and  vesicles. 

Eczema  Marginatum. — Under  the  combined  ac- 
tion of  heat  and  moisture,  ringworm  on  the  body  may 
become  severe  and  extensive.  It  may  spread  and 
be  very  chronic,  especially  on  the  inner  and  upper 
parts  of  the  thighs.  This  form  is  called  Eczema 
marginatum,  but  it  is  true  ringworm,  and  often  most 
difficult  to  cure. 

There  have  been  many  cases  lately  in  some  schools, 
but  it  is  more  often  seen  in  young  men  and  adults, 
especially  in  those  who  ride  much. 

It  commences  with  a  raised  red  patch  with  papules 
and  vesicles  and  much  irritation,  causing  the  patient 
to  scratch  the  parts.  The  circumference  has  a  weU- 
marked  defined  border  often  thickened  and  raised, 
and  it  spreads  rapidly,  with  a  tendency  to  heal  in 
the  centre,  leaving  a  dark-red  scaly  condition  of  the 
skin  and,  in  time,  marked  pigmentation. 

It  differs  from  ordinary  ring\\'orm  in  the 
eczematous  character  of  the  lesions,  and  the  con- 
gestion and  pigmentation  of  the  skin.  At  first  there 
is  a  luxuriant  growth  of  large  mycelium,  and  the 


RINGWORM 


129 


fungus  can  easily  be  detected  if  the  scales  on  the 
outer  edge  be  examined,  but  when  the  disease  has 
passed  into  the  chronic  form,  the  fungus  may  be 
difficult  to  find. 

In  all  forms  of  body  ringworm  the  diagnostic  point 
is  the  presence  of  well-marked  mycelium  ramifying 
amongst  the  epidermic  cells. 

Microscopical  Examination. — ^To  obtain  a  specimen 
for  examination,  the  inner  part  of  the  outer  ring 
should  be  scraped,  and  the  scales  placed  in  liquid 
potash.  The  glass  sHde  must  be  allowed  to  stand  for 
some  hours,  or  be  gently  warmed.  The  mycelium 
is  seen  as  long,  slender,  sharply-contoured  threads 
like  ribbons,  jointed  at  irregular  intervals,  and 
branching  in  all  directions.  Care  must  be  taken  not 
to  mistake  shreds  of  wool  or  cotton  for  mycelium, 
and  not  to  confound  the  margins  of  the  epidermic 
scales,  where  they  overlap  one  another,  with  threads 
of  mycelium.  The  diagnosis  is  easy  if  the  fine 
adjustment  be  used,  which  will  exhibit  the  outline  of 
the  scales. 

Diagnosis. — Eczema,  scurfy  places,  seborrhoea, 
and  pityriasis  may  be  mistaken  for  ringworm. 

The  patches  may  be  circular,  raised,  sharply 
circumscribed  with  a  ring-like  border,  and  scaly.  In 
Pityriasis  rosea,  especially,  they  may  even  become 
more  normal  in  the  centre  whilst  spreading  at  the 
edges,  and  thus  look  very  like  ringworm,  and  are 
often  mistaken  for  it ;  but  as  a  rule  there  are  many 
small  red  places  not  at  all  hke  this  disease.  If  in 
doubt,  the  scales  must  be  examined,  and  no  mycelium 
will  be  detected.  Seborrhoea  may  also  simulate  ring- 
worm, but  the  patches  are  generally  irregular,  and 
have  the  same  appearance  all  over.  Even  an  ex- 
perienced observer  may  be  mistaken,  and  it  is 

9 


130     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 

advisable  to  examine  microscopically  the  scales  from 
any  doubtful  spot. 

Ringworm  of  the  body  should  not  be  considered  to 
be  cured  until  the  place  is  almost  normal  again  at  its 
circumference.  The  place  may  still  be  shghtly  red 
and  stained,  but  the  margin  should  be  quite  free  from 
all  papules  and  scurfiness,  and  should  not  be  raised 
above  the  level  of  the  surrounding  skin. 

Treatment  of  Ringworm  of  the  Head. — It  is 
impossible  to  say  much  about  the  treatment  of  this 
trouble  in  a  small  space,  and  elsewhere*  I  have  fully 
described  the  different  ways  adopted  in  the  past ; 
but  since  the  x-iay  treatment  has  come  in,  most  that 
has  been  written  is  worthless. 

The  first  thing  to  do  is  at  once  to  isolate  the  patient 
and  prevent  the  disease  from  spreading.  This  is 
often  neglected,  and  some  parasiticide  is  simply 
appUed  to  the  place.  It  is  essential  that  the  whole 
scalp  be  treated. 

A  good  plan  to  adopt  (at  first)  is  to  cut  the  hair  off 
the  place  or  places,  and  to  thoroughly  wash  the  head 
with  carbohc  soap,  and  carefully  dry  it.  Then  at 
once  to  rub  in  an  ointment  containing  a  mild 
parasiticide.  I  prefer  sulphur,  and  use  a  drachm 
and  a  half  of  precipitated  sulphur  to  the  ounce  of 
benzoated  lard.  This  should  be  well  rubbed  into 
the  entire  head,  at  first  avoiding  diseased  patches, 
and  finally  rubbing  it  also  into  them.  A  httle 
carbolic-glycerine  (one  part  of  carboUc  acid  to  seven 
parts  of  glycerine)  may  also  be  dabbed  on  to  the 
affected  parts ;  but  it  is  not  advisable  to  use  any 
strong  parasiticide  at  first,  as  x-ray  treatment  may 
be  adopted  later  on.    The  great  thing  to  do,  at  first, 


*  "Ringworm  and  Alopecia  Areata." 


RINGWORM 


131 


is  to  make  the  whole  surface  of  the  skin  of  the  head 
(the  cuticle)  in  such  a  condition  that  the  fungus 
cannot  grow  amongst  the  epidermic  cells,  and  this 
is  usually  accomplished  by  using  sulphur  every  day. 
Of  course,  it  is  well  to  cut  the  hair  off  the  patch,  but 
I  never  advise  shaving  the  head,  as  then  it  is  difficult 
to  find  the  places.  If  sulphur  be  thoroughly  rubbed 
in,  ringworm  rarely  spreads,  though  small  places 
which  were  not  noticed  at  the  first  examination  may 
subsequently  be  discovered.  It  is  also  advisable 
to  disinfect  with  formalin  any  articles  that  may 
convey  infection,  as  clothes,  towels,  brushes,  combs, 
etc. 

The  next  question,  especially  for  the  schoolmaster, 
is  what  course  of  treatment  is  to  be  adopted,  as  it 
may  take  many  months.  My  opinion  is  that  cases  of 
ringworm  of  the  head  ought  to  be  sent  home,  and 
not  kept  at  school ;  and  thus  the  selection  of  the 
treatment  would  be  left  to  the  medical  man  attending 
to  the  case. 

Parasiticides  are  essential  to  stop  the  spread,  but 
they  rarely  cure  by  killing  all  the  fungus.  The 
diseased  hairs  have  to  be  got  out  of  the  folHcles,^ 
and  it  is  by  causing  inflammation,  etc.,  that  most^ 
of  the  parasiticides  effect  a  cure.  I  have  utterly 
discarded  all  the  old  treatments  by  ointments  and 
lotions  containing  parasiticides  (their  number  is 
legion).  In  nine  cases  out  of  ten  it  is  simply  a 
waste  of  valuable  time,  and  the  disease,  especially 
if  parasiticides  are  not  constantly  used  all  over  the 
head,  often  spreads.  Simple  remedies  will  easily 
cure  ringworm  on  the  body,  as  it  is  easy  to  get  the 
parasiticide  into  contact  with  the  fungus;  but  in 
ringworm  of  the  head  we  cannot  by  any  amount  of 
rubbing  get  parasiticides  deeply  enough  into  the 


132     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


closed  hair-follicles  to  get  into  contact  with  and 
destroy  the  fungus  about  the  roots,  and  diseased 
hairs  may  continue  to  grow  up  for  months  or  even 
years. 

Before  the  %-ray  treatment  was  discovered  I  cured 
the  cases  under  my  care  by  the  so-called  "  croton-oil 
treatment."  That  is,  by  using  a  small  quantity  of 
croton  oil  with  great  care,  and  constantly  bathing 
and  poulticing  the  place,  I  produced  sufficient 
inflammation  of  the  skin  to  cause  the  diseased  hairs 
to  be  thrown  off,  and  new  downy  hair  would  grow 
again.  Unfortunately,  this  treatment  requires  very 
special  knowledge  and  experience,  and  few  adopt  it 
now  that  the  %-ray  treatment  has  almost  entirely 
taken  its  place.  Personally  I  still  employ  croton  oil 
for  small  places  of  scalp  ringworm,  as  I  can  get  the 
places  well  more  quickly  than  by  ;%;-rays.  X-ray 
treatment  also  leaves  a  larger  bare  place  for  a  time, 
and  the  new  hairs  do  not  grow  again  as  quickly  as 
when  the  stumps  are  removed  by  croton  oil.  Croton 
oil  properly  apphed  only  removes  the  diseased  hairs, 
while  A;-rays  cause  all  the  hairs  on  the  part  exposed 
to  them  to  fall  out.  Therefore  the  bare  place  is 
generally  much  larger  than  the  original  spot.  Again, 
;c-rays  only  cause  the  hairs  to  fall  out  and  do  not  kill 
the  fungus,  and  unless  great  care  is  taken  the  disease 
may  easily  spread  while  the  ;i;7ray  treatment  is 
adopted. 

At  the  present  time  most  experts  advise  the  :*;-ray 
treatment  for  ringworm  of  the  head,  even  if  only  one 
or  a  few  places.  Great  care  is  also  exercised  con- 
cerning the  time  the  part  is  exposed,  and  mild 
parasiticides  are  kept  over  the  head  to  prevent  any 
spread  of  the  disease.  If  x-rays  be  used  they  ought 
to  be  appHed  by  some  one  thoroughly  acquainted 


RINGWORM 


133 


with  the  method  and  the  precautions  to  be  adopted, 
as  unfortunately  if  great  care  be  not  taken  permanent 
bare  places  may  be  produced,  and  I  have  seen  several 
during  the  last  few  years. 

If  the  x-id-Y  treatment  is  to  be  used,  strong 
parasiticides  should  never  be  applied  at  first,  as  no 
careful  operator  will  use  A;-rays  to  a  patch  of  ring- 
worm that  is  inflamed  by  parasiticides. 

Then  there  is  the  treatment  for  disseminated 
ringworm,  and  the  removal  of  scattered  stumps  left 
even  after  x-rd-y  treatment  has  cured  the  patches. 
These  can  best  be  removed  by  what  I  have  elsewhere 
described  as  "  croton  oil  needling."  A  number  of 
isolated  stumps  can  be  quickly  caused  to  come  out 
by  running  a  fine  special  needle,  coated  with  car- 
bolised-croton  oil,  into  the  hair  follicles  ;  but  this 
Httle  operation  requires  the  hand  of  an  expert,  and 
also  much  of  his  time. 

The  great  point  I  wish  to  emphasize  is  that  time 
ought  not  to  be  wasted  in  trying  first  one  ointment 
and  then  another,  but  any  spread  of  the  disease 
should  be  stopped  by  using  a  parasiticide  all  over 
the  head,  and  the  individual  places  cured  by  the 
%-ray  treatment,  or  by  croton  oil ;  but  only  by  some- 
one fully  acquainted  with  its  use  and  dangers. 

Disinfection. — Clothing  is  best  disinfected  by 
formalin,  and  may  be  placed  in  a  large  closed 
receptacle,  and  formalin  (one  part  of  strong  formahn 
(40  per  cent)  in  ten  of  water)  well  sprinkled  all  over 
the  clothes  (brushes,  etc.,  may  be  soaked  in  i  in  20 
formalin  solution),  and  kept  in  for  twelve  hours. 

Ringworm  of  the  Body— Treaiment— This  is 
quite  a  different  matter,  and  there  is  no  need  to  send 
a  boy  home ;  isolation,  and  disinfection  of  the  clothes 
are  advisable,  and  the  head  should  be  examined  to  see 
that  it  is  free. 


134     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


Any  simple  parasiticide  will  cure  body-ringworm, 
as  the  fungus  is  easily  got  at.  I  usually  employ 
Coster's  paste  (consisting  of  iodine  and  oil  of  tar). 
It  can  be  gently  rubbed  into  the  place,  and  for  a 
quarter  of  an  inch  outside  it,  and  a  piece  of  lint 
fastened  over  it  by  strips  of  plaster.  The  Coster's 
paste  may  usually  be  applied  every  day  for  three  to 
five  days,  and  then  the  place  will  probably  be  cured ; 
but  I  always  keep  a  sulphur  ointment  on  for  a  time, 
and  watch  it.  If  any  fresh  papules  appear  at  the 
edge,  more  Coster  paste  should  be  used.  Many  other 
apphcations  may  be  just  as  good,  as  liquor  iodi,  or 
iodine  and  acetic  acid. 

Eczema  marginatum  about  the  upper  part  of  the 
thighs.  It  is  advisable  to  treat  this  affection 
thoroughly,  and  with  the  patient  in  bed  a  few  days. 
Good  results  are  obtained  from  using  Coster's  paste, 
or  the  parts  may  be  painted  with  a  strong  solution  of 
iodine  and  iodide  of  potassium.  Of  course  this  will 
cause  some  pain,  but  it  is  an  efficient  treatment. 
SulphuroMS  acid  may  also  be  used,  but  should  be 
freshly  made,  as  the  acid  gets  weaker  by  keeping, 
and  may  get  partly  oxidized  into  sulphuric  acid. 
Sulphurous  (not  sulphuric)  acid  may  be  sponged  on 
the  parts  many  times  a  day.  After  using  strong 
applications  it  is  well  to  apply  a  sulphur  ointment 
for  a  time,  and  most  carefully  to  watch  the  edges  to 
see  if  any  fresh  papules  or  extension  of  the  disease 
appear.  Thorough  disinfection  of  any  clothes  worn 
next  the  skin  is  essential. 

H.  A. 


135 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

IMPETIGO. 

French:  Impetigo.    German:  Krustenflechte. 

IMPETIGO  is  a  contagious  affection  of  the  skin, 
which  is  specially  hable  to  affect  football  players, 
more  particularly  those  taking  part  in  the  Rugby 
game, — ^FootbaU  Impetigo  or  Scrum  Pox. 

The  disease  appears  as  a  slightly-raised  erythema- 
tous patch  on  the  skin,  which  quickly  becomes  a 
vesicle.  This,  at  first,  contains  clear  fluid,  but  rapidly 
becomes  purulent,  and  ruptures.  The  discharged 
contents  form  a  crust,  which  usually  is  surrounded 
by  an  erythematous  margin.  The  discharge  from 
the  scabs  is  contagious,  and  there  is  a  great  tendency 
for  the  disease  to  spread,  and  for  other  portions  of 
healthy  skin  to  be  infected  by  auto-inoculation  by 
scratching  with  the  nails,  towels,  etc.  The  glands  in 
the  neighbourhood  of  the  patches  enlarge  and  are 
liable  to  suppurate  and  become  abscesses. 

The  disease  is  due  to  one  or  more  micro-organisms, 
especially  to  the  germs  of  suppuration.* 

In  football  players  the  disease  appears  chiefly  on 
the  face,  scalp,  and  behind  the  ears.  It  is  produced 
by  the  excoriations  received  on  those  parts  from 
contact  with  the  jerseys,  possibly  infected,  of  other 
players.  Players  outside  the  scrum  may  become 
infected  in  other  accidental  ways. 


*  Staphylococcus  pyogenes  aureus  and  albus. 


136     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


The  poison  retains  its  vitality  for  a  considerable 
period.  It  has  been  proved  that  jerseys  may  retain 
their  infection  for  five  or  six  weeks  after  they  have 
been  worn.  Other  articles  of  clothing  or  toilet,  such 
as  caps,  towels,  shaving  brushes,  may  similarly  be 
ihe  agents  of  contagion.  The  attendant  on  a  patient 
may  be  inoculated  while  carrying  out  the  treatment. 

Treatment. — No  boy  who  has  any  appearance  of 
the  disorder  should  be  allowed  to  play  till  he  is 
completely  cured.  The  jerseys  should  be  made  of 
some  soft  material,  as  merino  ;  a  linen  collar  is 
desirable.  The  coarse  woollen  garment,  often  used, 
causes,  by  its  roughness,  the  abrasions  through  which 
the  poison  enters.  Jerseys  should  frequently  be 
washed,  and,  on  the  appearance  of  the  disorder  in 
a  school,  they  should  be  disinfected  by  steam  or, 
if  that  be  impossible,  boiled. 

The  crusts  should  be  carefully  removed  by  soaking 
with  boracic  lotion,  and  an  antiseptic  ointment 
applied,  such  as  sulphur  and  mercury,  or  dilute 
nitrate  of  mercury.  The  apphcation  of  peroxide  of 
hydrogen  (20- volume  solution)  daily,  gives  very 
satisfactory  results. 

H.  G.  A. 


137 


CHAPTER  XVII, 
SCHOOL  EPIDEMIOLOGY. 

EVERY  schoolmaster  and  school  doctor  will,  both 
for  their  own  sakes  and  for  that  of  their  school, 
naturally  be  anxious  to  prevent  the  introduction  of 
the  infectious  diseases  to  which  all  associations  of 
young  people,  such  as  schools  and  institutions,  are 
specially  hable.  It  is  somewhat  unfortunate  that 
the  greater  care  exercised  in  this  direction  during 
recent  years  has  appeared  to  operate  rather  in  the 
opposite  direction,  and  that  the  incidence  of  infec- 
tious diseases  in  schools  has  increased  rather  than 
diminished. 

As  an  illustration  of  this  the  following  figures  are 
given,  compiled  from  statistics,  for  the  last  twenty- 
eight  years,  of  a  large  public  school.  During  that 
period,  the  numbers  have  varied  from  400  to  500,  and 
3843  boys  have  been  admitted  at  the  average  age  of 
thirteen  and  a  half  years.  Infectious  diseases,  of  one 
kind  and  another,  were  introduced  on  ninety-eight 
occasions,  of  which  fifty-two  were  at  the  beginning 
of  terms,  and  forty-six  in  mid-terms.  The  total 
number  of  cases  was  1850.  The  yearly  average  of 
these  during  the  first  half  of  the  period  was  forty-two, 
that  for  the  second  half  ninety,  more  than  twice  as 
many.  The  reason  for  this,  doubtless,  is  that  the 
stringency  of  the  quarantine  regulations  now  im- 
posed, makes  the  parents  more  anxious  to  avoid 


138     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


the  occurrence  of  any  infectious  disease  in  the  home  ; 
and,  as  a  result  of  this,  many  more  young  people 
enter  school  unprotected  by  previous  attacks  of  the 
several  diseases. 

It  is  desirable  for  the  purpose  of  taking  precautions 
that  :— 

1.  An  accurate  knowledge  shall  be  obtained  of 
the  diseases  with  which  each  pupil  has  already  been 
attacked. 

2.  That  information  should  be  obtained  of  any 
pupil  having  been  exposed  during  the  hoUdays  to 
infectious  disease,  so  that 

3.  The  necessary  quarantine  should  be  imposed, 
the  period  of  this  being  determined  by  the  circum- 
stances of  each  case  and  the  incubation  period  of 
each  disease. 

I.  For  the  purpose  of  knowing  by  which  diseases 
each  pupil  has  been  attacked,  in  addition  to  state- 
ments as  to  his  general  health,  a  record  should  be 
obtained  on  a  form  similar  to  this  : — 

This  paper  must  be  filled  up  and  sent  to  the  Head  Master 
before  the  boy  joins  the  School. 

1.  Name  at  full  length  

2.  Date  and  place  of  birth  

3.  Has  he  had  Diphtheria,  and  when  ?  

4.  Has  he  had  Whooping  Cough,  and  when  ?  

5.  Has  he  had  Mumps,  and  when  ?  

6.  Has  he  had  Measles,  and  when  ?  

7.  Has  he  had  Rubella  (German  Measles),  and  when  ? 

8.  Has  he  had  Scarlet  Fever  (Scarlatina),  and  when  ? 

9.  Has  he  had  Chicken  Fox,  and  when  ?  

10.  Has  he  been  vaccinated,  and  when  ?  


SCHOOL  EPIDEMIOLOGY 


139 


11.  Is  his  general  health  good  ?  

12.  Is  there  any  peculiarity  of  his  constitution  necessary 

to  be  considered  ?  

Signed   

Address   

Date   

The  information  thus  received  can  be  kept  in  a 
convenient  way  on  a  register  similar  to  this  which 
shows  at  a  glance  the  number  of  individuals  un- 
protected from  each  of  the  diseases  : — 

Alphabetical  List. 


From  first  term,  191 2,  to 


Names 

OF 

Scholars 

scarlet 

FEVER 

MEASLES 

RUBELLA 

CHICKEN  POX 

MUMPS 

WHOOPING 
COUGH 

Notes 

+  Attacked 
before  entry 

—  Attacked 
after  entry 

Addison,  J . 

+ 

+ 

Akenside,  M.  . . 

+ 

+ 

Arnold,  M.     . . 

+ 

+ 

_ 

Beaumont,  F. . . 

+ 

Blair,  R. 

+ 

Blake,  W. 

+ 

+ 

Blunt,  G. 

+ 

Browne,  T. 

+ 

Cowley,  A. 

+ 

Cowper,  W. 

2.  Certificates. — ^The  information  as  to  exposure  to 
infection  during  the  hohdays  may  be  obtained  in 
two  methods  {a)  The  Negative ;  (6)  The  Positive. 


140     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


{a)  The  Negative  Method.— Ed.ch.  parent  or  guardian 
of  a  pupil  IS  supplied  with  a  certificate  which  he  must 
fiU  up  and  sign  at  the  termination  of  each  hoHdays 
to  the  following  effect : — 


Name  of  School, 


Health  Certificate. 

th^J^h^  H^^'h^f •f.^"^'^  P^''^'^'  °^  Guardian,  n<,i  earlUr 

tK^r,  ^°  ^  '°  It  '""St  be  presented  by 

Head  mLIS""^  °"  ^""^"^^^^^^        day  before  to  the 

I  hereby  certify  that,  to  the  best  of  my  knowledge 
and  belief  

has  not,  for  at  least  three  weeks,  been  suffering  from  any- 
infectious  ailment,  or  been  exposed  to  infection. 


Date 


Signed   

(Parent  or  Guardian). 


N.B. — If  the  pupil  be  exposed  to  anv  infection  during  the 
holidays,  immediate  notice  is  to  be  sent  to  the  Head  Master. 

{h)  The  Positive  Method. — On  each  notice,  bills,  etc., 
sent  to  Parents  or  Guardians,  the  following  is  inserted : 

•      No  pupil  shall  enter  or  return  to  the  School 
^  from  a  house  in  which  there  has  been  any 
^   infectious  disease,  during  the  holidays,  without 
giving  previous  notice  to  the  Head  Master  and 
obtaining  his  permission.    Notice  should  also 
O  be  given,  and  permission  to  return  obtained, 
in  cases  where  there  is  the  slightest  suspicion 
^  that  a  pupil  has  been  in  contact  with  any 
*^  infectious  disease. 

Both  methods  have  their  advantages ;  but  in  the 
experience  of  the  writer,  the  second  method  gives  the 
same  results  as  the  first  with  much  less  trouble  to  all 
concerned. 


SCHOOL  EPIDEMIOLOGY 


141 


There  should  be  a  similar  obligation  on  the  part 
of  the  School  authorities  to  give  information  to  the 
home,  of  any  infectious  disease  occurring  in  the 
school,  before  the  boys  return  for  the  holidays. 

The  period  of  quarantine  to  be  imposed  in  each 
case  will  be  determined  by  the  incubation  period  of 
each  disease,  a  margin  of  a  few  days  being  allowed 
for  safety.  These  have  been  considered  in  the 
previous  pages,  and  are  arranged  here  in  tabular 
form  for  convenience  of  reference. 


Table  of  Incubation,   Quarantine,  and 
Duration    of  Infectivity 


Incuba- 

Aver- 

(Quaran- 

tion 

age 

tine) 

Infectivity 

DAYS 

DAYS 

DAYS 

Measles  . . 

lO- 

-13 

12 

16 

21  days. 

Rubella  (German 

Measles) 

9- 

-1 8 

14 

20 

8  to  10  days. 

Scarlet  Fever  . . 

2- 

-  8 

4 

14  « 

6  weeks. 

Chicken  Pox 

12- 

-20 

14 

20 

14  days. 

Mumps  . . 

17- 

-21 

19 

24 

14  days. 

Whooping  Cough 

4- 

-14 

14 

21 

5  weeks. 

H.  G.  A. 


142 


Antiseptic 


Antitoxins 
Asepsis 
Bacillus 
Bacteria 

Catarrh 
Coccus 

Coma 

Comatose 

Conjunctiva 


Cornea 


Defervescence 

Desquamation 
Diagnosis 

Endemic 


Epidemic 


GLOSSARY. 

Having  power  to  prevent  putrefac- 
tion. Now  technically  applied  to 
those  chemical  substances  which 
can  check  the  growth  of  bacteria. 

Antidotes  to  poisons. 

Freedom  from  germs. 

A  rod-shaped  bacterium. 

(Little  sticks.)  Minute  vegetable 
organisms,  germs. 

An  increased  secretion  of  mucus. 

A  cell  or  capsule,  now  applied  to 
germs  having  a  circular  shape. 

A  state  of  deep  sleep. 

Lethargic.    Affected  with  coma. 

The  membrane  which  lines  the  inner 
surface  of  the  lids  and  is  reflected 
forwards  on  the  globe  of  the  eye, 
the  front  part  of  which  it  covers. 

The  strong  horny  transparent  mem- 
brane in  the  fore  part  of  the  eye 
through  which  light  passes. 

The  period  of  a  febrile  attack  in 
which  the  temperature  falls. 

The  separation  of  the  skin  in  scales. 

The  discrimination  of  disease  by  its 
distinctive  marks. 

Pecuhar  to  a  people,  country,  or 
neighbourhood  ;  applied  to  those 
infections  which  are  constantly 
present  in  a  given  locality. 

Prevalent  among  a  community ; 
applied  to  infections  only  occa- 
sionally present. 


GLOSSARY 


143 


Erythema 


Erythematous 

FOMITES 


Hair  Follicle 

"  Itis  " 
Lamellated 
Lesion 
Malaise 

Meningitis 

Micro-organism 


Mycelium 


Papillae 

Parasitic 

Pathogenic 
Prodromal 
Prognosis 

Prophylaxis 
Protozoa 

Pus 

Pustule 

Rigor 

Sebaceous 

Sequels 

Serum 


A  diifuse  red  rash  on  the  skin,  which 
disappears  momentarily  on  pres- 
sure. 

(Adjective.)    Like  an  erythema. 
(Chips  of  wood.)    AppHed  to  any 

substance    capable    of  retaining 

particles  of  contagium. 
A  depression  for  the  reception  of  the 

root  of  a  hair. 
A  suffix  used  to  denote  inflammation. 
Composed  of  thin  plates  or  scales. 
An  injury,  hurt,  or  wound. 
Undefined  uneasiness  of  the  body 

not  amounting  to  illness. 
Inflammation    of    the  membranes 

covering  the  brain  and  spinal  cord. 
A   minute   organism,   visible  only 

under  the  higher  powers  of  the 

microscope. 
The  part  which  ministers  to  the  sup- 
port of  a  plant  in  opposition  to  the 

structures  devoted  to  reproduction. 
Conical  projections,  especially  those 

at  the  root  of  the  tongue. 
Growing  or  living  on  some  other 

body. 
Disease  producing. 
Premonitory. 

Forecasting  the  probable  course  of 
a  disease. 

Preventive  treatment. 

The  lowest  class  of  the  animal  king- 
dom. 

Matter  from  a  wound  or  sore. 
A  little  pimple  containing  pus. 
A  strongly  marked  shivering  fit. 
Composed  of  sebum,  the  secretion  of 

certain  glands  in  the  skin. 
Symptoms   occurring   as   a  direct 

result  of  disease. 
The  yellowish  transparent  fluid  of 

the  blood. 


144     INFECTIOUS    DISEASES    IN  SCHOOLS 


Spores 


Streptococci 
Toxin 


Ulcer 
Vaccine 


Vesicle 
Virus 


Minute  bodies  capable  of  reproducing 
the  parent  organism,  but  less 
easily  destroyed.  Also  often  ap- 
plied to  the  reproductive  organs 
of  moulds,  e.g.  tinea. 

A  chain  of  cocci  linked  together. 

A  poison  (originally  arrow  poison). 
Now  usually  appHed  to  the  pro- 
ducts of  living  organisms. 

An  open  sore. 

The  killed  virus  of  any  specific 
disease  introduced  into  the  body 
by  inoculation  —  originally  the 
virus  of  cowpox. 

A  small  bladder. 

A  poison ;  usually,  at  present,  applied 
to  living  organisms  which  can 
produce  disease. 


PAGE 

ACTIVE  immunity      . .  7 
Acquired  immunity. .  8 
Age  incidence  of  cerebro- 
spinal meningitis  . .  98 

 chicken  pox          . .  58 

 diphtheria  . .        . .  75 

 measles      . .       . .  30 

 ringworm   ..  ..117 

 rubella       . .        . .  43 

 scarlet  fever         . .  46 

 whooping  cough   . .  66 

Alformant  lamp    . .        . .  20 

Alopecia  areata,  diagnosis 

of,  from  ringworm  125 
Animals  and  acute  polio- 
myelitis     . .        . .  106 

Antibodies  . .        . .        . .  7 

Antitoxin,  diphtheria      . .  7 

 prophylactic  use  of  14 

Antitoxins  . .        . .        . .  7 

Bacilli      . .        . .        . .  3 

Bacillus  of  typhoid         . .  86 

Bacteria,  diseases  due  to . .  4 

—  forms  of          . .        . .  2 
Bedding,  disinfection  of  . .  21 
Bordet  and  Genjou :  dia- 
gnosis of  whooping 
cough         . .        . .  68 

 germ   of  whooping 

cough         . .        . .  66 

Breasts,  inflammation  of,  in 

mumps       . .        , .  65 

Bronchitis  in  measles      . .  38 

Broncho-pneumonia  in 

measles     . .        . .  38 

—  after  whooping  cough . .  69 
Brush  rashes        . .       . ,  28 


"  Carriers  " 

—  in  cerebro-spinal  menin 

gitis  . . 

—  diphtheria 

—  epidemic  poliomyelitis 

—  scarlet  fever 

—  typhoid  fever  . . 
Cerebro-spinal  meningitis 

 bacteriology  of 

 "  carriers  "  in 

 clinical  course  of  . 

 definition  of 

—  —  history  of  . . 

 incidence  of 

 infection  of,  mode  of 

 mortality  of 

 prophylaxis  in 

 quarantine  in 

 serum  treatment  of 

Certificates  . . 

—  for  ringworm  . . 
Chicken-pox 

—  age  incidence  of 

—  confounded  with  small 


Catarrh  in  measles 
Caterpillar  rashes  . . 


33 
27 


pox  . . 

—  diagnosis  of 

—  incubation  period  of 

—  infection  of,  mode  of 

—  infectiveness  of,  dura 

tion  of 

—  prodromal  stage  in  . 

—  rash  of  . . 

—  seasonal  prevalence  of 

—  treatment  of    . . 
Clothes,  disinfection  of  . 
Cocci 

Communicable  diseases  . . 
Contagious  and  infectious 

diseases 
Convulsions  in  measles 
Croup  in  measles  . . 
Convalescence 

10 


PAGE 
9 

98 
82 
106 
48 

88 

97 
98 
98 
99 
97 
97 
98 
98 
102 
102 

99 
,  102 

139 
127 
58 
58 
58 
58 
61 
58 
58 

61 
58 
58 
58 
61 
21 
2 
2 

9 
33 
33 
24 


146 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Deafness  in  mumps      . .  65 

Defervescence       . .        12,  24 

Desquamation  in  measles  37 

—  in  rubella        . .        . .  44 

—  scarlet  fever  . .  . .  50 
Diagnosis,   differential,  of 

measles,  rubella,  and 

scarlet  fever         56,  57 

Diphtheria  . .        . .        . .  72 

—  animals  and    . .        . .  83 

—  antitoxin    in  prophy- 

laxis of      . .        . .  84 

 paralysis  after       . .  80 

 unpleasant  effect  of  81 

—  bacillus  of        . .        . .  72 

—  "  carriers  "  in  . .        . .  82 

—  clinical  course  of       . .  78 

—  definition  of    . .        . .  72 

—  diagnosis  of     . .        •  •  73 

—  faucial  . .        . .        . .  76 

—  heart  failure  in          . .  78 

—  Hofmann's  bacillus  in  75 

—  incidence  of     . .        •  •  75 

—  infection  of,  mode  of  . .  74 

—  infectivity  of   . .        . .  76 

—  laryngeal         . .        . .  78 

—  milk  and         .  •        . .  83 

—  nasal     . .        . .        . .  76 

—  paralysis  in      . .        . .  78 

—  quarantine  in  . .        . .  76 

—  treatment  of  . .  •  •  79 
Diseases  :  communicable  2 

—  infectious  and  contagious  9 

—  zymotic  . .  •  •  2 
Disinfection          . .        •  •  16 

—  of  bedding  and  clothes  21 

—  of  patient        . .        .  •  19 

—  in  ringworm    . .        •  •  i33 

—  of  rooms         . .        18,  84 

—  in  scarlet  fever          . .  55 

—  of  stools  and  urine     . .  21 

—  by  sulphur  and  formalin  20 
Drug  rashes         •  •        •  •  26 
Dust  and  epidemic  polio- 
myelitis     . .        •  •  105 

—  and  infection   . .        . .  10 

—  and  ophthalmia         . .  no 

—  and  typhoid  fever      . .  88 

Ears,  the,  in  measles      . .  38 

—  scarlet  fever  . .  •  •  5 1 
Eczema  marginatum       . .  128 

 diagnosis  of          ••  129 

 treatment  of        ••  I34 


PAGE 

Enema  rash  . .  . .  27 
Epidemic  poliomyelitis    . .  105 

 clinical  course  of  . .  105 

 infectivity  of        . .  105 

 mortality  in         . .  105 

 prophylaxis  of      . .  105 

Epidemics  of  measles,  time 

elapsing  between      . .  29 
Epidemiology,  school      . .  137 
Erysipelas,  streptococcus  of  4 
Erythema  . .        . .        . .  26 

Exanthemata,  the  acute  . .  23 

 concurrence  of  two 

or  more  . .        . .  23 

 definition  of         . .  23 

 immunity  to         . .  23 

 susceptibility  to    . .  23 

 transmission  of     . .  23 

 varieties  of..        ..  24 

Exanthemic  period  . .  24 
Eye,  infectious  diseases  of 

the  107 

 infection  in,  mode 

of       . .        . .  io8 

 prophylaxis  in 

108,  114 

 recurrence  in    .  .  108 

  seasonal  preva- 
lence of         . .  107 

 symptoms  of   . .  107 

 treatment  of  108,  114 

 varieties  of     . .  109 

 water  and  towels 

as  infecting 
agents  in       . .  108 

 ■  varieties  of     . .  109 

Eyes,  the,  in  measles       33,  37 

Ferments,  living  . .        .  •  2 

Fever,  management  of    ..  13 

—  in  measles       • .        33i  36 

—  in  rubella  . .  .  •  44 
— •  in  scarlet  fever          .  •  50 

—  symptoms  of  . .  •  •  i3 
Fevers,  eruptive   . .        •  •  2 

—  infectious        . .        •  •  2 

Fomites   1° 

Food  rashes         .  •        . .  20 

Formalin  in  disinfection  . .  20 

Fourth  disease,  the         •  •  55 

German    Measles,  (see 

Rubella)     ..  .-42 


INDEX 


147 


PAGE 

Germs,   behaviour   of,  in 

animal  bodies       . .  5 

—  diseases  due  to          . .  2 

—  mode  of  entry  into  body  4 
Glands,  the,  in  measles  . .  33 

—  in  rucella        . .        •  •  44 

—  in  scarlet  fever  . .  50 
Glandular  fever  . .  . .  70 
 clinical  course  of  . .  70 

—  —  complications  of  . .  71 

 incubation  period  of  70 

 mortality  in         •  •  7^ 

Health  record     . .        . .  138 
Hofmann's  bacilltis  in  diph- 
theria        . .        . •  75 

Immunity,  active  . .        . .  7 

—  natural  and  acquired..  6 

—  passive  . .        . .        . .  8 

—  from  scarlet  fever  .  .  47 
Impetigo    . .        . .        . .  135 

—  treatment  of  ..  ..136 
Incubation  periods  12,  24 
 of  chicken  pox      . .  58 

—  —  glandular  fever  . .  7° 
 measles      . .        . .  31 

—  —  mumps       . .        . .  62 

—  —  ringworm   ..        ..  118 

 rubella       . .        . .  43 

 table  of      . .        . .  141 

Infantile  paralysis  (see  Epi- 
demic poliomyelitis)  105 

Infection,  direct    . .        . .  g 

—  indirect           . .        . .  10 

—  in  chicken  pox           . .  58 

—  measles           . .        . .  30 

—  rubella  . .        . .        . .  48 

—  scarlet  fever  . .  . .  47 
Infections,  specific  . .  i 
Infectious  and  contagious 

diseases      . .        . .  9 

—  diseases,  causal  agents 

known        . .        . .  17 

 ■-  probably  known  17 

 unknown    . .  17 

 and  drainage        ..  11 

 precautions  for  pre- 
venting introduction 

of   138 

 prophylaxis  in      . .  14 

Infectious  fevers,  course  of  12 
Infectiveness,  duration  of, 

in  chicken  pox     . .  61 


PAGE 

Infectiveness,  duration  of, 
 in  diphtheria  . .  76 

—  —  in  measles  . .  •  •  41 

 mumps       . .  . .  63 

 rubella       . .  •  •  45 

 whooping  cough  . .  67 

 table  of      . .  . .  141 

Inoculation,  preventive  . .  14 

Intubation..        ..  ..  81 

Invasion     . .        . .  . .  15 

Isolation    . .        . .  •  •  i5 

Kidneys,   the,   in  scarlet 

fever  . .        • .  51 

Klebs-Loeffler  bacillus    . .  72 

 life  of,  outside  body  74 

Koch-Weeks  bacillus  113,  114 
Koplik's  spots  in  measles. .  33 

Lamp,  alformant  . .  . .  20 
Leather,  disinfection  of  . .  21 
Lingner's  apparatus        . . '  20 

Macular  rash      . .  . .  26 

Malaise       ..        ..  •  •  13 

Measles      . .        . .  . .  29 

—  age  incidence  in  . .  30 

—  antiquity  of     .  .  . .  29 

—  bronchitis  in    . .  . .  38 

—  broncho-pneumonia  in  38 

—  catarrh  in        . .  •  •  33 

—  complications  of  . .  38 

—  croup  in  . .        . .  38 

—  diagnosis  of     . .        39,  56 

—  diarrhoea  in     . .        . .  38 

—  epidemics  of,  length  of 

time  between        . .  29 

—  eyes,  the,  in    . .        33,  37 

—  fever  in  . .        33,  36 


—  glands  in 


33 


—  incubation  period  of  . .  31 

—  infection  of,  mode  of  . .  30 

—  infectiveness  of,  dura- 

tion of       . .        . .  41 

—  initial  rashes  in         •  •  35 

—  Koplik's  spots  in       •  •  33 

—  Meunier's  sign  in       . .  31 

—  mouth  rash  in..        ..  33 

—  nose  bleeding  in         . .  38 

—  prodromal  period  in  . .  33 

—  progiiosis  in    . .        . .  39 

—  rash  in  . .        . .        •  •  36 

—  remission  of  symptoms  33 

—  striking  range  in       •  •  31 


148 


INDEX 


nr       ^  PAGE 

Measles,  susceptibility  to . .  30 

—  treatment  of    . .        . .  41 

—  tongue,  the,  in..  ..  37 
Meningitis,  cerebro-spinal, 

serum  for  . .  . .  7 
Meunier's  weight  sign  in 

measles  . .  •  •  3X 
Mirchamp's    symptom  in 

mumps       . .        . .  63 

Morbilli  {see  Measles)      . .  29 

Mouth,  the,  in  measles    . .  33 

Mumps       . .        . .        . .  62 

—  ca.usal  organism  of    . .  62 

—  clinical  course  of       • .  63 

—  breasts    and  ovaries, 

inflammation  of,  in  65 

—  deafness  in      . .        . .  65 

—  definition  of    . .       . .  62 
history  of        . .        . .  62 

—  incubation  period  of  . .  62 

—  infectivity  of   . .        . .  63 

—  orchitis  in        . .        . .  64 

—  pancreas,  inflammation 

of,  in         . .        . .  65 

= —  quarantine  in  . .        . .  63 

—  submaxillary  gland  in  65 

Natural  immunity        . .  6 

Nose  bleeding  in  measles. .  38 

Opisthotonos  in  cerebro- 
spinal meningitis  . .  104 

Orchitis  in  mumps         . .  64 

Organisms,  saprophytic  and 

parasitic     . .        . .  3 

Ovaries,  inflammation  of, 

in  mumps  . .        . .  64 

Pancreas,  inflammation  of, 

in  mumps  . .        . .  65 

Papular  rash         . .        . .  26 

Parasitic  organisms         . .  3 

Paratyphoid  fever . .        ..  96 

Passive  immunity . .        . .  8 

Patient,  disinfection  of    . .  19 

Pneumonia  in  measles    . .  38 

Posterior  basic  meningitis  97 
Precautions  for  preventing 
introduction  of  in- 
fectious diseases    . .  138 
Predisposing    causes  to 

scarlet  fever         . .  48 

Preventive  inoculation    . .  14 

Prodromal  periods         . .  24 


Prodromal  periods  in  chic 

ken  pox 
 measles 

—  —  rubella 

 scarlet  fever 

Prophylaxis   of  infectious 

diseases 

 of  the  eye  108, 

Pulse,  the,  in  scarlet  fever 

Punctate  rash 

Pustular  rash       . .        .  '. 

Quarantine 

—  table  of,  periods 


page 

59 
33 
43 
48 

14 
114 
50 
26 
26 

21 
141 

Range,  strildng,  in  measles  31 
Rash,  the,  in  chicken  pox  58 

—  measles  . .        . .  36 

—  rubella  . .        . .        •  •  43 

—  scarlet  fever    . .        •  •  49 

—  typhoid  fever  . .  . .  90 
Rashes,  brush      . .        . .  28 

—  caterpillar       . .        . .  27 

—  drug  26 

—  enemata  . .        . .  27 

—  erythematous  . .        . .  26 

—  food      . .        . .        . .  26 

—  initial,  in  measles      . .  35 

—  macular  . .        . .  26 

—  papular  . .        . .  26 

—  punctate         . .        . .  26 

—  pustular  . .        . .  26 

—  serum    . .        . .        . .  27 

—  vesicular  . .  . .  26 
Register,  method  of  keeping  139 
Remission  of  symptoms  in 

measles  . .  . .  35 
Rheumatism  in  scarlet  fever  52 
Ringworm  ..        ..  ..117 

—  age  incidence  of  1x7 

—  bald      . .        . .        . .  125 

—  body     . .        . .     126,  127 

—  causation  of    . .        . .  120 

—  certificates  in  . .        . .  127 

—  chronic  . .        . .        . .  126 

—  contagiousness  of  ..117 

—  definition  of    ..  ..117 

—  diagnosis  of     ..  ..119 

—  disinfection  in  . .        .  •  133 

—  fungus  of        . .        . .  X18 

—  incubation  period  of  ..  xi8 

—  large  spore      . .     120,  124 

—  microscopical  examma- 

tion  in       . .        . .  122 


INDEX 


149 


PAGE  PAGE 

Ringworm,  recent          .,  121  Scarlet  fever,  varieties  of  . .  51 

—  small  spore  . .         120,  123  Scrum  pox  {see  Impetigo)  135 

—  stumps  in       . .     122,  127  Seasonal    prevalence  of- 

—  treatment  of   . .        • .  130  cerebro-spinal  menin- 

—  ;i;-ray  treatment  of    ..132               gitis           ..        ..  99 

Rooms,  disinfection  of    . .    19  chicken  pox         . .  58 

•  in  diphtheria        . .    84  rubella       . .        . .  43 

Rose  rash  {see  Rubella)    . .    42  mumps       . .        . .  62 

 idiopathic  . .        •  •    27  whooping  cough    . .  66 

^  spots  in  typhoid  fever. .    90  Septic  poisoning  in  scarlet 

Rubella      . .       . .        . .    42              fever         . .        . .  52 

—  age  incidence  of       . .    42  Seed  and  soil       . .        . .  6 

—  definition  of    . .        . .    42  Serum    in  cerebro-spinal 

—  desquamation  in        . .    44              meningitis  . .        . .  7 

—  diagnosis  of     . .        . .    45  —  diphtheria       . .        . .  79 

—  distribution  of  . .    42  —  Flexner's,   in  cerebro- 

—  fever  in..        ..        ..    44              spinal  meningitis  ..  102 

—  glands  in         . .        •  •    44  —  in  typhoid  fever         . .  8 

—  incubation  period  of  . .    43  —  rashes   . .        . .        . .  27 

—  infectiveness,  duration  of  45  Spirilla       . .        . .        . .  3 

—  rash  in  . .        . .        . .    43  Spores       . .        . .        . .  4 

—  seasonal  prevalence  of     43  Stools,  disinfection  of     . .  21 

—  treatment  of   . .        . .    45  Sub-maxillary    gland  in 

mumps       . .        . .  65 

Saprophytic  organisms  ..      3  Susceptibility  to  measles..  30 

Scarlatina  {see  Scarlet  fever)    46  —  scarlet  fever    . .        . .  46 

Scarlet  fever        . .        . .    46  Sulphur,  disinfection  by  . .  20 

 age  incidence  of    . .    46  Swimming  baths,  and  epi- 

 complications  of   . .    51               demic  poliomyelitis  105 

 desquamation  in   . .  50 

 diagnosis  of         52,  56  Temperature  {see  Fever)  13 

 disinfection  in      ..    55  Throat,  the,  in  scarlet  fever  48,  50 

 ears,  the,  in          ..    51  Tinea  (see  Ringworm)      ..  117 

 fever  in      ..        ..50  —  different  forms  of  ..118 

 geographical   distri-  Tongue,  the,  in  measles  . .  37 

bution  of          . .    46  —  scarlet  fever    . .        . .  50 

 glands  in    . .        . .    50  Toxins    5 

 infection  of,  mode  of    47  Tracheotomy        . .        . .  81 

 infectiveness  of,  dura-  Trillet's  apparatus          . .  20 

tion  of    . .        •  •    54  Typhoid  fever       . .        . .  85 

 immunity  to         •  •    47  bacillus  of  . .        . .  86 

 kidneys,  the,  in    . .    47  "carriers"  in  ..88 

 poison  of,  nature  of    47  in  children  . .        . .  91 

 predisposing  causes   48  clmical  course  of  . .  89 

 prodromal  stage  of     48  complications  of  . .  93 

 prognosis  in          ..    53  direct  infection  in . .  87 

 pulse,  the,  in        . .    50  disinfection  of      . .  85 

r^sh  in       . .       •  •    49  drainage  and        . .  88 

 rheumatism  in      . .    52  dust  and    . .        . .  88 

 septic  poisoning  in     52  flies  and     . .        . .  88 

 susceptibility  to    . .    46  food  infection  in   . .  88 

 throat  the,  in      48,  50  haemorrhage  in     . .  62 

 tongue,  the,  in      . .    50  history  of   . .        . .  85 

 treatment  of        • .    53  infection  in.modes  of  87 


150 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Typhoid    fever,  incidence 

of..       ..       ..  88 

 perforation  in       . .  92 

 prophylaxis  of      . .  94 

 quarantine  in       . .  89 

 relapses  in  . .        . .  91 

 rose  spots  in        . .  90 

 serum  for   . .        . .  8 

 sequelae  of  . .        . .  93 

—  —  treatment  of        ■  •  93 

—  vaccine           . .        •  •  95 

Urine,  disinfection  of    . .  26 

Urticarial  rash      . .       . .  26 

Vaccination  for  small-pox  8 

Vaccine  ia  typhoid  fever . .  95 

Vaccines     . .        . .        . .  8 

Varicella  (see  Chicken  pox)  58 

Vesicular  rash      . .        . .  26 

Vibriones   . .       • .       . .  3 


PAGE 

Water  and  towels  as  infect- 
ing agents  in  diseases 

of  the  eye  . .        . .  108 
Weight,   alteration  of,  in 

measles  . .        . .  31 

Whooping  cough  . .        . .  60 

 blood  examination  in  68 

 broncho-pneumonia 

after       . .        . .  69 

 clinical  course  of  . .  67 

 definition  of         . .  60 

 germ  of     . .        . .  66 

 incubation  period  of  66 

 infectivity  of       . .  67 

 mortality  in         . .  66 

 quarantine  for      . .  66 

X-RAYS,  treatment  of  ring- 
worm by    . .        . .  132 

Zymse        . .       . .       . .  2 

Zymotic  diseases  . .        . .  2 


JOHN  WRIGHT  AND  SONS  LTDl,  PRINTERS,  BRISTOL. 


MEMORANDA 


• 


^.TP  OF  CHILD  HEALTH